JP6686370B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine that includes a first moving means and a second moving means supported so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first moving means, and moves the second moving means relative to the first moving means ( Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-147411, A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the movement of the second moving means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the movement of the second moving means.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, the base member is supported on the base member, a first position and a first moving means which is reciprocably formed between the second position If, comprising at least a second moving means supported on said first moving means, and a driving means for operating said first moving means, said second moving means comprises a support means, through the supporting means a gaming machine which is displaceably supported on the first moving means, between a first state that causes the supporting force for supporting in order to tilt the second moving means, and a second state not causing the supporting force , a configuration unit configurable and a third state that moves between the second position of the second moving means defeated inclined compared to the first orientation and said first position for said first moving means, the fourth shape the second moving means is stopped at the second position If, to form, the third state and the fourth state is switched Oite after movement of the first moving means, gravity in the fourth state, not moving the second moving means to the first position In the third state, the center of gravity of the second moving means is on the one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the supporting means, and the center of gravity of the second moving means is on the supporting means. is configurable, and the other side state on the horizontal other side against, in the fourth state, there the horizontally one side relative to the center of gravity the support means of the second moving means, said one horizontal distance between the center of gravity of said supporting means and said second moving means in a side state, is less than the horizontal distance between the center of gravity of said support means in said fourth state the second moving means, said support Center of gravity of the means and the second moving means Changes in the horizontal direction between the the first and the second moving means in the state caused by receiving displacement load from at least the first moving means.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the constituent means includes a shaft-like portion, and a horizontal distance between the supporting means and the center of gravity of the second moving means changes. In this case, the displacement of the second moving means occurs in the rotation direction about the shaft-shaped portion .

Gaming machine of claim 3, wherein, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, comprising a substrate box.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according can improve the movement of the second moving means.

According to claim 2 gaming machine described, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to further improve the movement of the second moving means.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, the board can be housed in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of a variable winning a prize device, (b) is a front view of a variable winning a prize device, (c) is a side view of a variable winning a prize device in the direction of arrow XVc of Drawing 15 (b). is there. FIG. 16A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line XVIa-XVIa of FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B shows the variable winning device after sliding the movable upper lid member from FIG. 16A. FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the board lower unit taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the board lower unit taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17A. FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the lower unit of the board surface in which the arrangement of the light irradiation section is virtually changed from FIG. 18B. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 1st guide arm, (c) is a 1st guide arm in XXVc-XXVc line of FIG. 25 (a). 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm taken along line XXVd-XXVd in FIG. 25A. (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26 (a). 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm taken along the line XXVId-XXVId of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, a 2nd guide arm, and wiring. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28. FIG. 33 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. 32. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. 36. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a rear perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a rocking motion unit. 42A is a front view of the rocking motion unit, and FIG. 42B is a side view of the rocking motion unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. It is a front view of a swing motion unit. 43A is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member, the driven-side arm member, and the first bridging member taken along the line XXXXXXIVa-XXXXIVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a driven side arm member, and a 2nd bridging member. 43A is a partial side view of the swing motion unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVa in FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45B and 45C show the driven arm member bent to the front side from the state of FIG. 45A. FIG. 7 is a partial side view of the swinging motion unit showing the state of the movement in time series. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member and the driven-side arm member taken along the line XXXXXXIV-XXXXIV in FIG. 43. FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swing motion unit taken along line XXXXXXV-XXXXV in FIG. 43. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the swing motion unit in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the swing motion unit taken along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the compound motion unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound motion unit. It is a rear view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit. It is a partial front view of the compound motion unit in 6th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound motion unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in an eighth embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the 1st guide arm in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of a 1st guide arm, (c) is a perspective view of a detachable front locking member. . (A) is a front view of a 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 2nd guide arm, (c) is a 2nd guide arm in LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st guide arm and the 2nd guide arm of a wiring guide arm, (c) is the 1st of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of a guide arm and a 2nd guide arm. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 67 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along the line LXXI-LXXI in FIG. 66. FIG. 67 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68. It is an exploded front perspective view of a two-way operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a two-way operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a two-way operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a two-way operation unit. It is a front view of a transmission convex part and a contact member of a disk member. (A) is a graph showing vertical displacement of the operating member when the disc member is rotated at a constant speed, and (b) is a vertical direction of the operating member when the disc member is rotated at a constant speed. 5 is a graph showing the moving speed of the. FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit in the eleventh embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68. It is a front view of a disk member and a contact member. (A) is a graph showing vertical displacement of the operating member when the disc member is rotated at a constant speed, and (b) is a vertical direction of the operating member when the disc member is rotated at a constant speed. 5 is a graph showing the moving speed of the. It is a front view of the compound motion unit in a 12th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 50, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape with an upper surface protruding and protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a wind turbine (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. (See 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into a receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and the game area is launched). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display device is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also determines the type of big hit. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. .

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display of the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball shot on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variably displayed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Moreover, the number of the through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (Situation), it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, so that the player can aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is during a probable change, during a shortening time, or during a normal time), how to shoot a ball to the player. There is no need to change "left" and "right". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to be displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) that opens and closes the specific winning port 65a will be described later, but in brief description, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to cause the specific winning port 65a to move. It is opened and closed.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 314. Balls flowing down the game area that have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 314. The pair of outlets 314 are arranged on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. To send.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors 433, 462, 551 and a solenoid 474.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. First, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, a housing structure of the respective units 400 and 500 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 6) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The left and right outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a that is formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle of the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b that can fasten a member to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the front side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the end portion of the intermediate wall portion 212a opposite to the opening 211a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It is extended from the end of the side of 212a near the opening 211a.

  The holding and fixing portion 446 and the fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and the guide plate 424 is provided on the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Are fastened and fixed.

  Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports a drive motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the combined operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the biasing spring 445, and the guide plate 424. Is a member for guiding the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the combined operation unit 400. That is, neither is a production part directly visible to the player, but a part provided with an auxiliary role of production for generating a driving force for the operation of the composite operation unit 400 and guiding the operation. .

  By arranging the fixing plate 461, the holding and fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 having such a role on the front side of the rear case 210, a space on the rear side of the rear case 210 can be opened. By using this vacant space near the rear side as a space for retracting a portion that is actually visible to the player such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the combined operation unit 400 can be stacked in the front and rear, and the opening 211a. The width required to retract the combined operation unit 400 to the outside can be narrowed. Therefore, the formation width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be narrowed. Thereby, the opening 211a can be enlarged and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be enlarged.

  In the operation unit 200, the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are housed in the inner space of the back case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the combined operation unit 400 is disposed on the left and right and the upper part of the region formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is disposed inside the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. It is arranged below the region formed by the side surface (see FIG. 5).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, an outline of operation modes of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 are referred to as appropriate.

  7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that in FIG. 7, the state where the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is arranged in the projecting position is shown, and in FIG. 8 the state where the moving member 540 of the rocking motion unit 500 is arranged in the projecting position is shown, and in FIG. The state in which the main body member 410 of the combined motion unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing motion unit 500 are arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the combined operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. That is, in the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . As will be described later, the combined operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shield member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and rocking operation) in different movement modes as the main body member 410 slides.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing motion unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised and the moving member 540 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . The moving members 540 are formed in a pair of left and right, and at the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of left and right moving members 540 are visually recognized as a united body.

  As shown in FIG. 9, both the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged in the extended position. In this case, the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integral decorative member (partially overlapped in a front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the width outside the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, the combined operation unit 400 and the swinging operation unit 500 project in different directions (downward, upward) toward the center of the opening 211a, so that, for example, compared with a case where all the movable members are projected in the same direction, The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened. Accordingly, when the moving speeds of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are the same, the period of time for moving from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 18, a board surface lower unit 300 arranged below the game board 13 will be described. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the board lower unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. In addition, in FIG. 10, only the front plate member 320 is shown disassembled from the game plate 13, and in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front unit 310 of the lower board unit 300 and the variable winning device 330 are further shown in FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. Further, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a can be changed as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by the movable upper lid member 332 on the upper side, the lower edge by the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides by the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313. .

  As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the closed state and the open state as the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIG. 11, the lower board unit 300 is a unit that constitutes an outlet 314 through which a ball is discharged and a specific winning opening 65a, and is a hole that is formed in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A front unit 310 fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, a front plate member 320 fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and having a spherical path formed on the back side, and a receiving opening 60a. The variable winning device 330 mainly includes a movable upper lid member 332 that is fitted and fastened and fixed from the back surface side and that changes the falling direction of the ball.

  The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a sphere can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed left and right at the center of the front side of the main body plate portion 311. , A plate-like inclined plate portion 312 that is provided on the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311 so as to project to the front side, an opening upper side portion 313 that is recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311, and the opening upper side thereof. A pair of outlets 314 are provided mainly on the left and right sides of the portion 313, and the balls are discharged to the outside of the game area.

  The main body plate portion 311 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by the first winning opening lower side 311a formed above the electric accessory 640a and forming the lower side of the first winning opening 64, and the pair of members of the electric accessory 640a. The second winning opening 640 provided, a light irradiation device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and directed to the front side in a rib shape on the outside of the out opening 314. And a ball-sinking rib 311c that is convexly provided.

  The light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320 and is directed upward (to the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning the second winning opening 640. Is an LED member that is irradiated with light.

  The ball flow rib 311c is for adjusting the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sloping plate portion 312 is formed so that a ball can roll on the upper side surface thereof, is arranged above and below the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as it approaches the electric accessory 640a. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state in which the electric accessory 640a is tilted to the left and right, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 and flows down can be won at the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the upright closed state, the sphere that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 and drops down can be dropped to the front side of the opening upper portion 313 with high probability.

  The opening upper part 313 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the left and right center. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the upper opening 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to win a ball from the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball flows down along the inner rail 61 to the central portion of the game board 13, and the central portion of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction. Since it is possible to win the prize, you can continue playing.

  Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), the straight line intersecting with the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to raise and arrange the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes higher.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved similarly to the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is located at a low position. Can be placed at.

  In addition, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the upper surface of the specific winning opening 65a is spherical toward the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed of a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. The arrangement of the dowels that guide the can be lowered downward. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The outlets 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the outlets 314 is arranged below and the upper side of the outlets 314 is arranged above the left and right ends of the opening upper portion 313. It That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the outlet 314. Thereby, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330 described later can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even with such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the sphere flows down on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 which has the upper side surface having substantially the same shape as the opening upper side portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the outlet 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmissive resin material, is arranged on the front side of the front unit 310, and is formed so that a sphere can flow down between it and the main body plate portion 311. A main body plate portion 321 having a plate shape, a first winning opening front portion 322 disposed at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 321 to guide the ball to the first winning opening lower side 311a, and arranged below the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory lower support portion 323, the out-port lower plate 324 arranged along the lower side surface of the outer outlet 314, and the rear side of the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. The ball feeding unit 325 is mainly provided.

  The main body plate portion 321 is provided with a ball-sinking rib 321 a provided on the back side so as to project in a rib shape on the outer side of the outer lower plate 324. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electric accessory lower support part 323 is provided with a housing recess 323a that is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a.

  The out-out lower plate 324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in a row in the left-right direction. Further, the out-out lower plate 324 is provided with step portions 324a protruding upward at left and right inner end portions. Due to the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 324, the ball that has flowed down can be decelerated. Further, the rib formed on the out-out lower plate 324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side. As a result, the speed at which the ball that has flowed down is discharged to the outlet 314 can be improved.

  Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed right above the out-out lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), a ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 faces the out-out lower plate 324. It is prevented from falling. That is, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 and then drops falls inside the pair of out-out lower plates 324 in the left-right direction (the position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged) or falls out of the out-out lower plate 324. Either it falls to the outer end (the vicinity of the ball flow rib 321a and the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from dropping from a high place on the out-out lower plate 324, and improve the durability of the out-out lower plate 324.

  The step portion 324a is a step formed between the outlet 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball flowing down from the left-right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the outlet lower plate 324 crosses the step 324a. And is prevented from flowing down to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). That is, the sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down on the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 324 is exclusively guided to the out-out 314.

  The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side and left and right side surfaces 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the rear surface, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the rear surface. As a result, the downward direction of the sphere that has reached the sphere feeder 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and prevent so-called over-winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear cover member 334 that accommodates a solenoid 333 that generates a driving force that slides the moving upper cover member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 and that is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the main body member 331. And, mainly.

  The main body member 331 is provided with a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, a lower passage 331b through which the ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and is arranged below the lower passage 331b and is directed upward. Mainly includes a light irradiation device 331c for irradiating light, and a rear side accommodation portion 331d that is a recess formed on the rear side toward the front side and accommodates the solenoid 333, the lever member 334b, and the like. .

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the odd-shaped through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the moving upper lid member 332, and is a front portion that accommodates the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 that accommodates the rear side plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a pentagonal recess in which a lower side is horizontally extended in a front view, an upper side is inclined upwardly toward the center, and left and right side sides are vertically extended.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the center of the front opening 331a1 on the back side. That is, the outer shapes of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shapes of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a do not form steps in the front-rear direction, but are formed at surface positions. Thereby, the moving upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

  The lower passage 331b is a pair of left and right spheres that allow balls to pass therethrough (see FIG. 18 (a)), and is a passage formed below the lower edge of the inner rail 61 so as to extend beyond the lower edge of the sphere. A sensor S that detects the passage of the vehicle is provided (see FIG. 15B).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1 and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (below the receiving opening 60a). As a result, devices necessary for the light irradiation device 331c can be arranged below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. The lower edge (see 2) can be lowered.

  The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation portions 331c1 are formed in a pair of right and left under the lower passage 331b and irradiate light upward.

  The rear housing portion 331d is in communication with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

  The movable upper lid member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and includes a front plate portion 332a housed in the front opening 331a1 and a rear plate portion 332b housed in the rear opening 331a2. A center rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front side plate portion 332a and the rear side plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d vertically formed in the rear end portion of the rear side plate portion 332b. Prepare mainly.

  The front side plate portion 332a is formed by a plate-shaped portion 332a1 that is formed so as to rise and slope toward the center in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening 331a1 and the plate-shaped portion 332a1 in the up-down direction. Mainly includes a lightening hole 332a2 and a guide rib 332a3 that extends downward in the left and right ends of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-shaped portion 332a1 is provided with a front inclined side surface 332a1f which is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward (see FIG. 16) and which is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the center portion in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f, the ball can flow toward the center. It is possible to prevent the sliding movement of the movable upper lid member 332 from being obstructed by the balls.

  Since the front side sloped surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to effectively reflect the light, a metal film may be formed on the front side sloped surface 332a1f, or mirror processing may be performed. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  The guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15). As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation in the left-right direction when the movable upper lid member 332 slides.

  The center rib 332c is formed at the bent portion of the front plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side plate portion 332a can be improved. In addition, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the retracted state), the movable upper lid member 332 is retained on the rear surface side of the opening upper portion 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the central rib 332c and the ball.

  The connecting hole 332d is a through hole into which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted, and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the moving upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 16).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a drive source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b arranged below the main body 333a and vertically moved below the lever member 334b.

  The rear lid member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b that is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and has a front end that is movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a body portion 334b1 extending in the up-down direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 protruding in a columnar shape in the left and right directions at the lower end portion of the body portion 334b1 and pivotally supported by the body portion 334a, and At a substantially middle position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2, a lower claw portion 334b3 extending below the main body portion 334b1 and capable of accommodating the hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. And a connecting portion 334b4 that is formed to bulge into a cylindrical shape.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 will be described. FIG. 16A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 taken along line XVIa-XVIa of FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B is a sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 16A. It is a sectional view of the variable winning a prize device 330 after it is made. Note that FIG. 16A illustrates a retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is rearwardly arranged, and FIG. 16B illustrates an extended state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is frontally disposed, and The center rib 332c is partially omitted to facilitate understanding of the path E1. 16 (a) and 16 (b), the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged upward and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be won (open state) in the specific winning port 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the movable upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state, the lever member 334 b is tilted forward around the shaft portion 334 b 2 by pushing the hook-shaped member 333 b downward. The movable upper lid member 332 is slid to the front side while being brought into contact with the side surface of the side housing portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17) (closed state).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swinging of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the path of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation portion 331c1 reaches the front side inclined surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to incline toward the rear side as it goes downward, the light emitted from below and reaching the front inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected forward (toward the player). In this case, the player can visually recognize as if the front side sloped side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected onto the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be noticed. As a result, the performance capabilities of the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, when the moving upper lid member 332 is provided with an LED or the like to cause the moving upper lid member 332 to emit light, the moving upper lid member 332 may increase in size. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LEDs are not arranged on the moving upper lid member 332, it is possible to improve the performance of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect part while suppressing the moving upper lid member 332 from increasing in size. You can

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the projecting state, the light emitted from the light irradiating section 331c1 upward along the path E2 and traveling toward the front inclined side surface 332a1f is the inner rail 61. The front side inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 does not reach due to being shielded by. In this case, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the front plate portion 332a and only transmits as it is, so that the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 are formed. Is seen darkly by the player.

  That is, whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion 331c1 reaches the front side sloped surface 332a1f changes depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, and the front plate Whether or not the light emitting range E0 of the member 320 is visually recognized changes. Therefore, by confirming the brightness state of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning port 65a.

  Therefore, even when it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 in a front view because the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth as in the present embodiment (FIGS. 17A and 17B). )), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning port 65a based on the change in the brightness of the projection area E0.

  Here, the movement upper lid member 332 is required to form a closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning port 65a and an open state that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning port 65a ( The brightness state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the forward / backward slide movement). In other words, since the state of the projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper cover member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the movable upper cover member 332 can be used both for the purpose of switching whether or not the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and for the purpose of performing an effect by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 331c1.

  The light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere by passing through the path E1 when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b to perform the effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be illuminated brightly when viewed from the front.

  With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the extended state and when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state will be described. 17A and 17B are partial front views of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 17A illustrates a case where the moving upper lid member 332 forms an extended state (see FIG. 16B), and in FIG. 17B, the moving upper lid member 332 is in a retracted state (see FIG. 16). 17A and 17B, the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 17A and 17B. 17 (a) and 17 (b), whether the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging or not is indicated by the presence / absence of shading. That is, in FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b), the shaded portion is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate member 320 blocks passage of the sphere between the front plate member 320 and the front plate member 320. This is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the ball falling on the path C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 may fall down due to the weight of the ball, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and interferes with the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 has a length several times as long as the length of the movable through-hole member 332 extended to the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times the length, see FIG. 16B). It is housed in the odd-shaped through hole 331a and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the side surface of the odd-shaped through hole 331a in the vertical direction over the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the odd-shaped through hole 331a, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the sphere colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. As a result, the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the peg to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered, so that the third symbol display device 81 The rim can be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 from the left and right along the path C1 collides with the step 324a and is discharged to the outlet 314, so that the ball falling along the path C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the stepped portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out port 314 where the ball falling from the stepped portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

  Further, in this case, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the sphere that has flowed down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 due to gravity. It is moved and enters the specific winning opening 65a from there. In addition, since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), the ball can be smoothly inserted into the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 17).

  Thereby, the moving upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated from the inner rail 61 upward by at least the diameter of the sphere at least near the center of the game area (near the inner rail 61 is arranged at the lowest position). Since it suffices to do so, it is possible to lower the disposition position of the movable upper lid member 332. Therefore, as compared with the case where it is necessary to separate the inner rail 61 upward from the inner rail 61 at a position other than near the center of the inner rail 61, it is possible to lower the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330. Thereby, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the functions of the ball-sinking ribs 311c and 321a and the ball-sending portion 325 and the fact that light is condensed by the front side inclined surface 332a1f will be described. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the board lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 18B is a board lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17A. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the board lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation units 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18B.

  Note that, in FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described by paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper lid member 332 that is in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is located on the front side (upper side in FIG. 17B) of the cross section of FIG. 18A and is not actually visible, but for convenience of description, it is viewed in the vertical direction (in FIG. FIG. 18 (a) is shown by an imaginary line in a state in which the positions (in the vertical direction) match. Further, in FIGS. 18B and 18C, three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually shown.

  The path of the ball that is rolled from the left-right direction along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ball rolling from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts at least one of the ball-sink rib 311c and the ball-sink rib 321a. That is, a ball rolling while abutting on the body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts on the ball-sink rib 311c, and a ball rolling while abutting on the body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball-stripping rib. It comes into contact with 321a.

  Here, when the sphere comes into contact with the ball-flowing rib 311c, the velocity direction of the sphere is oriented in the direction along the path C1a, and then comes into contact with the ball-flowing rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

  By bringing a ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) into contact with the ball-sinking rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be oriented along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18A) before the ball is placed on the front side of the outlet 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the ball is placed on the front side of the outlet 314 until the ball is discharged from the game area, and it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the outlet 314. In addition, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the outlet 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

  A case will be described in which a ball falls between a pair of left and right stepped portions 324a. In this case, the ball dropped between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball comes into contact with the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feeding portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the ball follows the path C2a. Change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), and thus it is possible to suppress over-winning.

  When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the light is blocked by the sphere, so that the light does not reach the front side inclined surface 332a1f. Therefore, whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) can be confirmed by visually recognizing whether the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 is bright or dark. it can.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmissive resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning port 65a, and it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the specific winning port 65a. Also, it is possible to confirm that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a by the change in the brightness of the projection area E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the downward direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18 (b)). Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in the direction of light traveling (see FIG. 18C) or the case where the sphere flows down along the irradiation direction of light, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. The period in which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b shields light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 are visually recognized brightly, and it is possible to secure the performance ability of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the downflow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower path 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. After that, the light is no longer blocked by the sphere (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f) around the front end of the lower passage 331b (right side in FIG. 18B).

  In this case, even if a series of spheres flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere, so that the brightness of the front side inclined side surface 332a1f and the projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 is changed. By checking, it is possible to check the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the downward direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are in a parallel relationship, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (on the left side of FIG. 18 (c), near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is no longer blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the path E3 of the light remains blocked by the sphere.

  In this case, when a series of spheres flow down the lower passage 331b, as long as the sphere is arranged in the lower passage 331b, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the sphere on the left side in FIG. 18C). Furthermore, after the first sphere has dropped downward from the rear end portion of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18C), the light path to the second sphere (sphere on the right side in FIG. 18C). E3 is blocked. In addition, when the second sphere (third sphere) enters the lower passage 331b when the second sphere falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, the path of the light to the sphere. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to block the path E3 of light, and the sphere is always visually recognized as dark while flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the light is viewed brightly or darkly does not always match the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a does not always match. Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the advantages described above.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, since the front side sloped surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiation sections 331c1 is reflected by the front side sloped surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1 and reaches the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is arranged on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning port 65a can be hidden, while the front side inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in brightness of the front side sloped surface 332a1f. In that case, there is a problem in that it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light emitting section 331c1, and the light emitting elements that can be used for the light emitting section 331c1 are limited.

  On the other hand, since the front side sloped surface 332a1f focuses the light emitted from the light irradiation section 331c1 on the center of the front plate member 320, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation sections 331c1 is superposed, It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation portion 331c1 can be improved (a light emitting element with low light intensity can be selected).

  In addition, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is visually recognized as partially overlapping in a front view (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, by making the colors of the light different from each other, the pair of light irradiation units can be irradiated. Light of a total of three colors, which is the color of the light emitted from each of the portions 331c1 and the color in which they are combined, can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is individually shielded by the sphere rolling along the path C2a (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the sphere shields the light, The color of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be switched variously.

  For example, in FIG. 18, consider a case where the right side light irradiation unit 331c1 emits "blue" color light and the left side light irradiation unit 331c1 emits "red" color light. In this case, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red” from the right side in the projection area E0 (see FIG. 17B). Is visible.

  In this case, if the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 and blocks the light emitted from the light irradiating section 331c1, the “blue” color light is blocked, so the light projection range E0 Only "red" colored light is visible in the.

  On the other hand, if the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 and blocks the light emitted from the light emitting unit 331c1, the “red” color light is blocked, so that the projection range E0 is Only "blue" colored light is visible.

  In this way, the mode of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation section 331c1 shields the light. This change of the light state is caused by the sphere flowing down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change of the light state can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change of the form of the light emitted from the light irradiator 331c1 is caused by electronic control, a more random effect can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a V shape in a top view, but it may be formed in a parabolic shape in a top view from the viewpoint of collecting light.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37.

  19 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. 19 and 20, the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is shown in the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixing plate 461 are not shown. In the combined operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

  21 is a front exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular main body member 410 that is slidable in the vertical direction, and one end portion of the main body member 410 that can be guided to both left and right end portions. The shield member 420, which is a pair of members connected to each other and whose other ends are axially supported by each other, the swinging member 430 that is swingably disposed on the center front side of the main body member 410, and the main body member 410. A pair of leg members 440 fastened and fixed to both ends and extending in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 having guide holes 452 for guiding the leg members 440, and a driving force necessary for moving the leg members 440 are provided. The driving device 460 for generating the rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410 are connected to each other and wiring is housed inside. Composed mainly comprises a guide arm 480, a.

  23 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430, and FIG. 24 is a rear exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430.

  As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the main body member 410 includes a plate-shaped base member 411 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and holes formed in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends of the base member 411. A long hole-shaped leg insertion hole 412 that is extended, and a direction that is arranged on the inner side of the leg insertion hole 412 of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction and is inclined upward toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411. A guide hole 413 having a long hole shape and a columnar member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 toward the front side and having one end of the wire guide arm 480 pivotally supported. The arm shaft support portion 414, the holding portion 415 extending upward from the center of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and having a hook-like tip end, and a pair of swinging members 430 arranged at the lower end portion of the base member 411. Shaft support hole 431a of A shaft support portion 416 that supports the photo sensor 417, which is disposed in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passage portion 435d of the swinging member 430; and a decorative plate portion 418 formed in a substantially semicircular shape in a front view, Mainly equipped with.

  The base member 411 has a shape in which the center part in the left-right direction hangs downward from both left and right ends. With this, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be disposed in the space (see FIG. 29).

  The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in a long hole shape, and by inserting the connection fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440, the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating axially with respect to the base member 411. It Thereby, the postures of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 413 is a long hole into which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and slid, and is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. A front lid 413a, which covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and whose side surface facing the guide hole 413 is formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413, is disposed above the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413b that is a plate-shaped portion that projects from the front side of the base member 411 and that is inclined upward along the guide hole 413 is provided.

  The front end of the support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421. As a result, the swinging of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, so that the posture of the shield member 420 during movement can be stabilized.

  The arm shaft support portion 414 is arranged on the left side in front view with respect to the center portion of the base member 411, and more specifically, is arranged at an intermediate portion between a portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to hang down and a central portion in the left-right direction. To be done. It should be noted that an end portion (lower end portion) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support portion 414, and a collar member is provided at the tip of the arm shaft support portion 414. Fastened and fixed.

  The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked by a slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) provided on the rear upper plate 470. That is, when the main body member 410 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the hook-shaped portion of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other, The downward movement of the body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the hooked tip. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position while the slide lever 473 is extended.

  The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that is visible in a front view together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is arranged in the projecting position, and is in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), which is in contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

  The shield member 420 includes a swing base member 421 formed such that the ends of a pair of plate-shaped members are pivotally supported, and a decorative member having an upper end fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. 422, a pair of connecting members 423, one end of which is pivotally supported coaxially with the pivotal support position of the rocking base member 421, and the other end of which is pivotally supported. A guide plate 424, which is formed with the hole 424b and is fastened and fixed to the upper end of the rear case 210 on the front side, is mainly provided.

  The swing base member 421 is formed of a pair of plate-like members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape, and is a swing shaft coaxially supported by a shaft support hole 423d formed at one end of the connecting member 423. A hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide holes 413 of the main body member 410, and an abutting plate 421d that is provided on the back side and abuts the upper surface of the main body member 410 are mainly provided. .

  A portion of the swing shaft hole 421b, which serves as a swing shaft for the pair of plate-shaped members 421a, is pierced by a shaft support rod 423c inserted through one end of the connecting member 423 and is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423. Is.

  Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved along the main body member 410 below the intermediate position (see FIG. 30). It is moved closer to the center in the left-right direction.

  The contact plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-shaped member 421a to the back side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d come into surface contact at the retracted position.

  The decorative member 422 has a pair of width-thickness portions 422a arranged on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in a front view and having a lower end portion. And a hanging portion 422b formed to be curved rearward of the swing base member 421.

  The hanging portion 422b is arranged closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

  The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a bent in a V shape in a front view at the bent portion 423b, and includes a shaft support rod 423c. The shaft support rod 423c is provided at one end of the rod member 423a. A shaft support hole 423d through which the shaft is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e that is inserted into and guided by the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a.

  The bent portion 423b is bent above a straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged farther from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423, and the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a columnar portion that is inserted into the guide hole 424b and a disc-shaped collar member that is fastened and fixed to the tip of the columnar portion.

  The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and a pair of guide holes 424b that are a pair of long holes that are formed in the left and right ends of the base plate 424a in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction. , Is mainly provided. The pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

  The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the back case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 to guide the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position farther from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed larger by that amount.

  The swinging member 430 is a member that is swingably supported by the shaft support portion 416, and is disposed so as to project toward the front side of the central portion of the main body member 431 and the base member 411 that are swingable. A member 432, a drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 to generate a driving force for driving the main body member 431, a drive gear 434 that is axially supported by the drive motor 433, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear 434. A transmission gear 435 that is axially supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a coupling member 436 that couples the coupling shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the coupling shaft 431b of the main body member 431. Prepare for

  The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and has a shaft support hole 431a which is bored in the left and right direction below both ends in the left and right direction on the back side and through which the shaft support part 416 is inserted, and a back surface. Mainly includes a connecting shaft 431b that is disposed in the central portion on the side and one end of the connecting member 436 is axially supported.

  The connecting shaft 431b is arranged at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end portion on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a on the back surface side of the main body member 431. As a result, the moving width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be made larger than the moving width of the connecting member 436 actually moved back and forth.

  The transmission gear 435 is rotatably supported by the base member 432, and a main body portion 435a in which a gear that meshes with the drive gear 434 is formed over substantially a half circumference, and extends to the opposite side of the gear formed in the main body portion 435a. Formed along the side surface on the front left side of the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c protruding from the overhanging tip of the overhanging portion 435b to the right in front view. And a sensor passage portion 435d (see FIG. 34) whose peripheral portion passes through the photo sensor 417 and which is formed in a fan shape in the left-right direction.

  The connecting member 436 is a rod-shaped member having holes formed in parallel with each other at both ends thereof, and one side connecting hole 436a formed at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. , And the other-side connecting hole 436b that is provided at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435.

  It returns to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 and demonstrates. The arm member 440 is formed into a long plate-shaped main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction, and a cross section protruding from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side in a long hole shape in which the vertical direction is long. Connection fixing part 442, a pair of insertion shaft parts 443 projecting from the upper and lower end parts of the main body part 441 to the rear side and inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and the lower end part of the main body part 441 to the front side. Of the biasing spring 445, which is provided in a protruding manner to one end of the biasing spring 445, and the other end of the biasing spring 445, one end of which is locked to the locking portion 444, is locked while the other end of the rear case 210 is locked. A holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side is mainly provided.

  A rack gear 441a is engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 441 facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is meshed with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 to drive the drive device 460. The force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

  Since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the vertically extending guide member 450, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. You can Further, since the insertion shaft portions 443 are formed in a pair of upper and lower sides, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

  The biasing spring 445 generates a biasing force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the biasing spring 445 functions as a fixed-side end that is locked by the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end functions as a moving-side end that is locked by the locking portion 444.

  The guide members 450 are a pair of left and right main body members 451 that are plate members that are long in the vertical direction, and a pair of vertical holes that are formed in the main body member 451 in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. Guide holes 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 for fixing the drive device 460 at the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and a leg member 440 disposed at the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 and the retracted position ( 19) and a cover member 454 disposed on the front side of the leg member 440.

  The driving device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step backward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side thereof is the fastening portion 212b of the rear case 210 ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461, a driving motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a driving gear 463 pivotally supported by the driving motor 462 are mainly provided.

  Since the fixed plate 461 has a shape in which the side away from the main body member 410 is raised to the front side, a gap surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixed plate 461 can be formed on the side away from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the biasing springs 445 are arranged on the left and right sides of the leg member 440, the lateral width of the leg member 440 including the biasing springs 4454 becomes large, which reduces the lateral width of the opening 211a. Was there. In the present embodiment, the biasing spring 445 can be arranged in a gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the rear case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and the left and right of the leg member 440 are correspondingly arranged. The space in the direction can be suppressed.

  The rear upper plate 470 is a member fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and includes a plate-shaped main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471. A cylindrical shaft support 472 protruding from the upper left end of the front view to the front side, a slide lever 473 elongated in the left-right direction disposed in the central portion of the main body 471, and the slide lever 473 extending in the left-right direction. A solenoid 474 for generating a driving force to be moved to the main body 471 and a front cover 475 fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473 are mainly provided.

  The shaft support portion 472 is a portion on which the one-side tubular portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip thereof. The wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is provided so as to pass through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

  The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), and prevents the main body member 410 from moving downward. is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. By contacting the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated at the contact surface.

  The slide lever 473 changes the overhang amount depending on whether or not electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 is projected to the left in front view when electricity is conducted, if the electricity is conducted, the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415, and the main body member 410. Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not in contact with each other, and the main body member 410 is allowed to move downward.

  Here, it is also conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415 as the main body member 410 is placed in the retracted position. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released during the period from the position where the main body member 410 is located at the retracted position until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473. Therefore, when detecting the disposition of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the drive device 460, it is necessary to control the drive device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473, which is difficult to control. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is arranged to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward while the slide lever 473 is extended (see FIG. 31). Then, the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is disposed in the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 is re-projected and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 are released. The upper surface of 473 is abutted (see FIG. 29). As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever extended, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, control of the drive device 460 becomes easy.

  The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a that is a recessed groove that guides the slide lever 473 is formed on the back surface along the left-right direction. The slide groove 475a of the front cover 475 causes the slide lever 473 to slide. The displacement in the vertical direction during movement is suppressed.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that is formed of a resin material and guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 to the main body member 410. The formed one side tubular portion 481b is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 472, and the second guide arm 482 that pivotally supports the other end portion of the first guide arm 481 at one end portion. And a third guide arm 483 that pivotally supports the other end of the second guide arm 482 at one end and the other end of which is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support 414.

  Here, the wiring W is an electric wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a band shape (formed to be wide in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than that of the first guide arm 481 by at least the diameter of the collar member C, and the length of the third guide arm 483 is longer than that of the second guide arm 482. Is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is a member configured to accommodate the wiring W therein and prevents the wiring W from breaking and breaking. Thereby, it is not necessary to dispose the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space for disposing the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be enlarged in the left-right direction.

  Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. Note that the third guide arm 483 is configured to include what has been described as the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as a technical idea, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along line XXVc, and FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25A.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 includes a plate-shaped arm portion 481a formed in an elongated plate shape and a left end of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a when viewed from the front. Of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a (the lower side surface in FIG. 25A), and the one-side cylindrical portion 481b extending in the front-rear direction and the plate-shaped arm portion. The other side tubular portion in which the shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a at the end portion on the opposite side of the one side tubular portion 481b among the end portions of the 481a and which extends in the front-rear direction. 481c, an attachment portion 481d formed in a plate shape at a predetermined interval above the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a bottom portion 481e connecting the back side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d, and an attachment portion 481d. Front locking portion 481 extending from the front side surface toward the plate-shaped arm portion 481a And, mainly includes the.

  The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross section formed by the plate arm 481a, the attachment 481d, and the bottom 481e (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against other members or being sandwiched by other members.

  In the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a cutout portion 481a1 is formed in a portion opposed to the front locking portion 481f, and the plate thickness of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is reduced in the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed. .

  The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a shape slightly larger than the front locking portion 481f in a front view, and is formed over the width direction of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. Note that the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted in the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed (the bottom portion 481e is formed through).

  By configuring the cutout portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (one-way die cutting). Further, by inserting the wiring W from the cutout portion 481a1, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481.

  The portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a other than the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed has a shorter gap with the attachment portion 481d than the extension width of the front engaging portion 481f. Therefore, in the state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and is elongated in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is prevented from falling off to the front side (front side of FIG. 27A). Can be prevented.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 481a includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape over the width direction on the side surface facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other-side tubular portion 481c pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib protruding from the second guide arm 482 at the intermediate portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with the portions N.

  The other-side tubular portion 481c is provided with an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and in order to form an overlapping margin with the second guide arm, the rear end surface is closer to the front surface than the bottom portion 481e. It is formed (see FIG. 25B).

  The expanded diameter portion 481c1 is formed over the inner circumference side of the other-side tubular portion 481c over a half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25A), and from the other-side bottom portion 481e2 side of the other-side tubular portion 481c to the other. It is a recess formed to a length approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side tubular portion 481c (see FIG. 25 (c)).

  The attachment portion 481d includes an arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other-side tubular portion 481c around the other-side tubular portion 481c, and is provided to extend to the front side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. . Accordingly, even when the flat surface locking portion 481f is formed, it is possible to secure a gap for inserting the wiring from the front side.

  The attachment portion 481d includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N protruding from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

  The arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other-side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). It

  In addition, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), the wiring is attached in a path not blocked by the rear case 210 when the wiring W is replaced or maintained. Must be removed. In the present embodiment, the attachment portion 481d that is close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed to project to the front side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a that is separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, the wiring W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, so that the upper wall surface of the rear case 210 interferes with the work. It never becomes. When inserting the wiring, insert it in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of the replacement of the wiring W can be improved.

  The bottom portion 481e is disposed above the one-sided tubular portion 481b and is formed in a fan shape around the axis of the one-sided tubular portion, and the other one is disposed above the other-sided tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom portion 481e2 is formed mainly in a fan shape centering on an axis that is spaced upward by a predetermined distance from the axis of the side tubular portion 481c. The end portion of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed leftward in front view as compared with the end portion of the other-side bottom portion 481e2.

  The flat surface locking portion 481f is a claw-shaped member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

  26A is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26B is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26C is a XXVIc of FIG. 26A. FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 along the line XXVIc, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 along the line XXVId-XXVId of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the second guide arm 482 has a plurality of configurations of the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. To do. That is, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is the plate-shaped arm portion 482a, the other-side tubular portion 481c is the other-side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f, respectively.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 482a includes a cutout portion 482a2 at a portion arranged to face the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the cutout portion 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the cutout portion 481a1, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d are provided with rib portions N on their side surfaces facing each other. A rib portion N is formed on the attachment portion 482d in the vicinity of the one-side shaft support portion 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, and in the middle portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-shaped arm portion 482a. And the auxiliary portions 482d are alternately formed.

  The second guide arm 482 has a one-sided shaft support portion 482b, which is formed in a cylindrical shape from the upper right portion of the bottom portion 482e to the front side and has a fastening portion at the tip thereof, and the one-sided shaft support portion 482b. One side bottom portion 482e1 formed in a substantially arc shape and extending on the same plane from the bottom portion 482e, and the right end portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a protruding from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 to the front side. And an arc-shaped plate portion 482a1 that is connected to the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1.

  The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends outside the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). It

  The one-sided shaft support portion 482b is a portion where the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other side tubular portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 is the other side tubular portion. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the side surface on the back side of the shaped portion 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e can contact each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, excessive rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being excessively bent (see FIG. 27).

  The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed over a half circumference (a lower half circumference in FIG. 26A) on the outer peripheral side of the one side shaft support portion 482b, and from the one side bottom portion 482e1 side of the one side shaft support portion 482b. It is a recess formed to a length approximately half the length of the supporting portion 482b (see FIG. 26C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, swing of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described. 27A and 27B are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. 27 (a) shows a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state in FIG. 29), and in FIG. 27 (b), FIG. The state in which the second guide arm 482 is swung counterclockwise in a front view from the state of a) to the end portion of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27B, the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are brought into contact with each other to prevent the second guide arm 482 from further swinging. To be done.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W has a recessed portion (FIG. 25 (d) and FIG. 26 (d) formed by the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, the attachment portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e. ) Reference). Therefore, due to the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wire W from being bent to such an extent that the wire W is broken during the movement of the main body member 410.

  In addition, at the pivotally supported positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 (right end of FIG. 27A), the wiring W is arranged around the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, at the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent with a radius of curvature equal to or smaller than the diameter of the other-side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being bent, and disconnection of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. When the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position at a high speed, it is easier to improve the effect. When the main body member 410 is started from the state of being stopped at the retracted position, it is necessary for the drive device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotation resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 forming the wiring guide arm 480 at the pivotal support positions is small.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the expanded diameter portion 481c1 and the expanded diameter portion 481c1 around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b are formed. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is surrounded. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from a mating member that forms a shaft support relationship, and have the effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. When the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the expanded diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-sided cylindrical portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27 (b), the range in which the expanded diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-sided cylindrical portion 481b is substantially half the circumference (FIG. 27 (b) upper half circumference). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the expanded diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 largely overlap. In this case, the rotation resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state of FIG.

  From the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481, the expanded diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap. Becomes longer, and the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be decreased as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

  Therefore, the speed at which the other-side bottom portion 481e2 and the one-side bottom portion 482e1 abut can be slowed down, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 contact the other-side bottom portion 481e2 and the one-side bottom portion 482e1. The contact load can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are urged to the opposite side (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state of (b) to the side rotated further counterclockwise).

  In the present embodiment, the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by pivotally supporting three members, so that even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is variable. can do.

  For example, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). Changeable) can be changed. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by changing the posture of the third guide arm 483 while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the other-side bottom portion 481e2 and the one-side bottom portion 482e1 are brought into contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Due to this gap, even if the wiring W bends to the outside of the other-side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B), the wiring W is sandwiched between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. It is possible to prevent the disconnection of the wiring W and prevent the disconnection of the wiring W.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the open state, the wiring W largely moves to the outside of the other-side tubular portion 481c, and particularly, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W is apt to be displaced in the vicinity of the end portion (axial support position) of the arm 482. When the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 rub against each other, and the durability of the wiring W is improved. There is a risk of deterioration in sex.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are hooked on the wire W by the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner side surfaces thereof. It is possible to improve resistance with the second guide arm 482 and prevent the wiring W from being displaced.

  The wiring W is effectively formed by forming the rib portion N on the side surface on the opposite side of the direction in which the wiring W separates from the other-side tubular portion 481c in the vicinity of the pivotal support position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Can be supported physically. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W protruding from the connecting position of the arcuate attachment portions 481d1 toward the attachment portion 481d side is pressed against the plate-shaped arm portion 481a along the shape of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1. . Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be increased.

  The wiring W is fitted into the recess by curving the side surface of the portion near the pivotal support position of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a to which the above-mentioned wiring W is pressed to the side opposite to the attachment portion 481d so that the wiring W is fitted into the depression. The positional deviation between W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be suppressed. In this case, since the surface of the curved recess and the wiring W come into surface contact with each other, local abrasion of the wiring W is suppressed as compared with the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. You can

  In addition, the space between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the shaft support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined in such a manner that the attachment portion 481d moves away from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. 27B. In this case, the wiring W is curved by the portion (the portion near the other-side tubular portion 481c) where the distance between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is widened, so that the slack of the wiring W near the support portion is reduced. It can be absorbed, and the positional displacement of the wiring W at the intermediate portion of the first guide arm 481 (the portion sandwiched by the front locking portion 481f) can be suppressed (the wiring W cancels the slack in the vicinity of the support portion). Therefore, the displacement of the first guide arm 481 in the longitudinal direction can be suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and being worn, and to improve the durability of the wiring W.

  At the intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces facing each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rib portion N is formed only on one of the inner side surfaces that are arranged to face each other, the wiring W can be more easily caught by the rib portion N. Thereby, the resistance between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased, and the positional deviation between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

  In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped collar member C that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The collar member C is, for example, fastened and fixed to the tip of the one-sided shaft support portion 482b or the tip of the shaft-supported portion 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted into the one-sided tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each of the tubular portions 481b and 481c. It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

  In the present embodiment, the collar member C is extended to a position where at least a part overlaps the adjoining attachment portions 481d and 482d in the front view, or even if the collar member C does not overlap in the front view, the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, The wiring W is extended from between 482d to a position where the wiring W does not fall off. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27B, there is a gap between the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed away from the one-side tubular portion 481b (expands outward). Therefore, the possibility that the wiring W will fall out of the gap is small. That is, the collar member C is extended until it overlaps with the wiring W when viewed from the front (FIG. 27), and thus has a diameter sufficient to prevent the wiring W from falling off. This prevents the wire W from falling off the wire guide arm 480.

  Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact when the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded, Cannot be folded. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 have different lengths in the longitudinal direction. That is, in the state in which the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded until the extending directions thereof are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The provided collar member C and the collar member C disposed on the front side of the other-side tubular portion 482c are different from each other to the extent that they do not interfere with each other.

  Accordingly, by disposing the collar member C, it is possible to suppress the wiring W from falling off the wiring guide arm 480, and also to suppress the arrangement space by folding the wiring guide arm 480. The lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length to the axis of the collar member C) are preferably different from each other by at least the diameter of the collar member C.

  Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, changes in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described.

  28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 31 is a combined operation unit 400. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

  Note that FIGS. 28 and 29 show the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIGS. 30 and 31 show the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the states of FIGS. 28 and 29. While the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in the state where the main body member 410 is maintained, FIG. 32 and FIG. The state in which the member 410 is arranged in the extended position is shown.

  Further, in FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30, and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is illustrated by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is illustrated by an imaginary line. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is shown in phantom.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is enlarged, and in the enlarged view, a state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the ends of the pair of guide holes 424b on the center side is illustrated by an imaginary line. To be done. Further, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is enlarged, and in the enlarged view, a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c has moved from the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 by a predetermined amount is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  When the drive gear 463 is rotated, the main body member 410 is moved vertically along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 meshed with the drive gear 463 moves.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shield member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 when the main body member 410 is in the retracted position. Thus, the center portion of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the outer end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. , And the wiring guide arm 480 is folded in a posture in which the extending directions of the guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other, so that the main body member 410 is prevented from moving downward.

  As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanical portion of the swinging member 430, such as the transmission gear 435, is a gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 (formed at the center in the left-right direction and downward). It is arranged in a gap which becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). Accordingly, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be packed in the shielding member 420 in the vertical direction, and the vertical widths of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 can be reduced. Can be suppressed. In this case, the area of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 in front view can be reduced, and accordingly, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be made larger.

  Here, for example, mechanical parts such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 may be disposed on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (to bring the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 closer to each other in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is attached to its mechanical portion. It is conceivable to place it on the front side of. On the other hand, in this case, it is necessary to move the swinging member 430 accommodating the decoration member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), so that the space on the front side of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, and the neck is reduced. It becomes difficult to form the swinging member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swinging member 430 (mechanical portion such as the transmission gear 435) can be housed in the space created by the pair of decorative members 422 being separated from each other. it can. Thus, for example, it is not necessary to move the decorative member 422 to the front side of the mechanical portion of the swinging member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422. The 430 can be placed close to the body member 410. This allows the swinging member 430 to be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

  Note that, in FIG. 28, since the swinging member 430 takes the posture in which the main body member 431 is tilted (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the posture in which the main body member 431 stands (see FIGS. 32 and 35). It Therefore, even when the swinging member 430 alone is viewed, the area of the swinging member 430 formed in front view can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shield member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 when the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. Thus, the central portion of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is supported (that is, the shield member 420 has the same posture as that of FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Is located in. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the third guide arm 483 is placed on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are respectively inclined with respect to the left-right direction.

  Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the state in which the third guide arm 483 is stably placed on the upper surface of the main body member 410 is It can be maintained longer during the movement of 410. As a result, the wiring W disposed inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be made more stable, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at a high speed and disposed at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420 is formed. There is a possibility that the shaft supporting position (the shaft supporting rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 may bounce upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 that guides the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the inner side in the left-right direction, and the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. The hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction.

  In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c causes the insertion shaft portion 421c to be a directional component perpendicular to the bouncing direction of the pivotal support positions of the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. Is movably guided in the direction having.

  Therefore, resistance F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward with the upward movement of the swing base member 421, and the insertion shaft portion 421c is moved upward. Is suppressed. In this case, the swing base member 421 is prevented from bouncing upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 from being rebounded at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swinging base member 421 bounces upward and the connecting member 423 bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is brought into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, thereby suppressing the movement of the connecting member. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bending portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423 and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, the bending portion 423b is still formed in the swing base member 421. Moves in a direction away from the upper side surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center side in the left-right direction by a distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction, a sufficient gap can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421, and the connecting member 423 It is possible to prevent the collision with the swing base member 421. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  In the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the horizontal movement of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 begins to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the guide hole 424b in the right side in the front view is located at the center of the pair of guide holes 424b in the left-right direction. The movement of the swing base member 421 is restrained at the end portion, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the projecting position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Is located in. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the posture in which the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are brought into contact in the swinging direction. Take

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c ascends in the opposite lateral directions along the guide hole 413 along with the movement. That is, the forces applied from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 to the pair of swing base members 421 are directed in opposite left and right directions and cancel each other out. Therefore, the swing shaft holes 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axes of the pair of swing base members 421 are prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the projecting position, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 are in contact with each other. As a result, for example, even if one swing base member 421 moves faster than the other swing base member 421, and the pair of swing base members 421 are misaligned (vertical shift) with each other, The position shift can be suppressed by contact with the swing base member 421. Thereby, the posture of the shielding member 420 at the extended position can be stabilized.

  The change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap each other when viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position to the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the projecting position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, especially in the center portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is reduced. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be visually recognized separately.

  As a result, the area of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in front view is smaller when the main body member 410 is arranged at the projecting position than when the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. The width is increased, and in particular, the width in the vertical direction at the central portion in the horizontal direction is expanded. In this case, in the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which is likely to attract the player's attention, it is possible to increase the area change in a front view of the region formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420, and the effect is produced. The effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the change in the area of the overlapping portion P described above occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to project to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the effect can be performed as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Next, the operation of the swinging member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. 32. 34, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted is shown by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is housed between the main body member 431 and the main body member 410 of the swinging member 430. The illustrated state is shown. Further, in FIG. 35, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line, and a state in which the swinging member 430 is tilted is shown by an imaginary line for reference, and is arranged in an extended state. The moving member 540 of the swing motion unit 500 is shown in phantom.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435 c moves back and forth, and When the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft supporting portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in the direction in which it approaches and separates from the decorative member 422b. The swinging member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at any position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

  Since the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swinging member 430, when the swinging member 430 is in the tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side that is arranged to face the shielding member 420. It is possible to secure a large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swinging member 430, which is the opposite side of the shielding member 420, can be reduced, and the swinging member 430 can be moved in comparison with the case where the swinging member 430 slides back and forth. It is possible to suppress the space required for disposing.

  In other words, when the space for housing the shielding member 420 is secured by the sliding movement in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swinging member 430, which is the opposite side of the shielding member 420, also moves by the distance D similarly to the upper end portion. Therefore, the space for disposing the swinging member 430 increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swinging member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 can be smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430, and the arrangement area of the swinging member 430 can be reduced. It is possible to achieve both suppression.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is small while the swinging member 430 tilts. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted while another member is close to or in contact with the lower portion of the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress a load from being applied between the members.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downward convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 approaches the curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap with each other in a front view). This makes it possible to change the posture of the main body member 431 with a large width in the upper portion of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect of allowing the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 to be close to each other and visually recognized integrally in the lower portion of the main body member 431. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decoration member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined downward toward the bottom (closer to the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23)) and toward the back surface (main body member 410 side). It is formed in a curved shape away from the swinging member 430. In this case, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 can be secured when the decorative member 422 begins to be housed between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and the decorative member 422 and the neck can be secured. It is possible to avoid a collision with the swing member 430.

  In addition, the lower end of the decorative member 422 can be stored deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430 while the upper end of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. . Since no other member is arranged on the front side of the swing member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in a state where the swinging member 430 is erected, the decoration member 422 is separated upward from between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is removed. The upper end portion and the body member 410 are arranged close to each other. Accordingly, it is possible to fill the dead space when the decoration member 422 is not housed between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430. Further, since the posture in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is arranged close to the main body member 410 can be formed, the movement width of the swinging member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined is increased. This can be ensured, and the effect of swinging the swinging member 430 can be improved.

  Here, in FIG. 34, the swinging member 430 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81, and the swinging member 430 is tilted. In this case, the direction A1 of the effect surface on the front side of the swinging member 430 is a direction inclined obliquely downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swinging member 430 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and a state in which the swinging member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the effect surface on the front side of the swinging member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swinging of the swinging member 430, the direction A1, A2 on the front side of the swinging member 430 is directed to the player's eyes (the front side of the center of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted to. Therefore, the attention of the swinging member 430 can be improved, and the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, in order to improve the attention force of the swinging member 430, a new rotary shaft is not provided, but the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23) is utilized. That is, the shaft supporting portion 416 aims to secure a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be housed between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and to swing the swinging member 430. It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the directions A1 and A2 of the front side of the member 430 toward the player's eyes (the front side of the center of the third symbol display device 81).

  The degree of swing of the swinging member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passing portion 435d passes the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passage portion 435d has not passed the photo sensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passage portion 435 has passed the photo sensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gap between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410 is ensured when the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417.

  Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 upward while the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417, the shield member 420 is moved to the main body member 410 without causing the swinging member 430 and the shield member 420 to interfere with each other. It can be housed between the swinging member 430.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, it will be described that the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. 36 and 37, a state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in a state where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is in an intermediate posture between the upright state (see FIG. 35) and the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In some cases, the control is performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG.

  Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) that drives the body member 410 after confirming that the body member 431 of the swinging member 430 has reached the tilted state (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the standing state shown in FIG. 35. When is rotated, the state where the back surface side of the main body member 431 abuts on the hanging portion 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

  However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after the completion of the operation of the swinging member 430. Therefore, compared with the case where the drive motor 433 that tilts the swinging member 430 (see FIG. 23) and the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 is changed from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. The period to change to the state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the state of FIG. 34 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 at the same time. In this case, the main body member 410 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 changes from the upright state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swinging member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, and the composite operation unit 400 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the hanging portion 422b is formed to be curved (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swinging member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a plane) of the main body member 431 is not contact with the surface but contact with a point (line). Therefore, the frictional resistance at the contact position can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400 due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

  For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving upward from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is reduced. When it is large, it becomes a factor that reduces the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 tilts following the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b, so that the hanging portion 422b applies a driving force to the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430. The giving relationship arises. As a result, the load of the drive motor 433 tilting the swinging member 430 can be reduced.

  Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving downward from FIG. 34, friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. If the resistance is large, it becomes a factor that reduces the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the body member 410 can be increased. In addition, since the hanging portion 422b is formed in such a manner that it is slanted downward and inclined, and the back side of the main body member 431 is formed in a planar shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while contacting them, the hanging portion The 422b and the main body member 431 do not get caught on each other.

  From these, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the combined operation unit 400 can be immediately changed by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted.

  Next, the swing motion unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50. 38 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the swing motion unit 500. 38 and 39, the moving member 540 is shown in the retracted position.

  The swing motion unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right motion units (see FIG. 5), but since the technical configuration thereof is common, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the left side motion of the left and right motion units is performed. The unit will be described as a swing motion unit 500.

  40 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing motion unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the swing motion unit 500. Note that the fastening hole 527 is partially enlarged in FIG. 40, and the bridging member 528 is partially enlarged in FIG. 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the swing motion unit 500 includes a base member 510 having a rectangular plate shape and shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends thereof, and the one side shaft support hole 522 is formed in the base member 510. The distance between the drive shaft arm member 520 having a long plate shape in which the shaft is swingably supported and the center axes of the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is determined by the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526, the length of which is the same as the distance between the center axes of the driven shafts 526, and the one side shaft support hole 532 at one end is pivotally supported by the base member 510 so as to be swingable. A horizontally elongated block-shaped moving member 540 pivotably supported by the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520 and the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the drive side arm member 520. Drive force to swing the A drive device 550 for generating the power and a front plate member 560, which is disposed on the front side of the base member 510 with the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 interposed therebetween and to which the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed, are mainly described. Prepare

  The base member 510 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 511, a plurality of columnar support portions 512 projecting from the right side portion of the main body portion 511 in a front view to the front side, and a lowermost first support portion of the shaft support portions 512. The drive gear receiving hole 513 formed in the left side of the three-shaft portion 512c in the front view, the photosensor 514 arranged in the right side of the shaft support 512, and the rectangular shape from the left side of the main body section 511 in the front view to the front side. Mainly includes a lower support portion 515 protruding in a shape.

  The body portion 511 is formed such that the left end of the first shaft portion 512a in front view and the right end in front view have different upper end portions. That is, on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a when viewed from the front, the step-down portion 511a having the upper side surface lowered by one step is provided.

  The step-down portion 511a has an effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 8) in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing motion unit 500 is arranged at the projecting position. Further, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 is tilted backward, an area in which the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 may contact each other in the front-rear direction is set. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). Thereby, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position to the extended position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the extended position to the retracted position, the driven-side arm member 530 and the main body 511 are separated from each other. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

  The shaft supporting portion 512 is formed of three rod members which are arranged vertically apart from each other and whose axes are parallel to each other, and one end of the driven arm member is axially supported in order from the top. A shaft portion 512a, a second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is supported, and a third shaft portion 512c on which a transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is supported. Prepare mainly.

  The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole into which a step portion projecting to the back side of the drive gear 552 is fitted.

  The lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the driving side arm member 520 in a state where the driving side arm member 520 is arranged at the retracted position, and the other end portion of the driving side arm member 520. The part is prevented from rocking further downwards.

  The drive-side arm member 520 is a member made of a resin material, and is a body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the body plate portion 521 (the end portion on the right side in front view). ), A one-sided shaft support hole 522, which is bored in the front-rear direction and through which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a semicircle centered on the one-sided shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 having gear teeth engraved on the outer periphery thereof, a sensor passage plate 524 fastened and fixed to the raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and the one side shaft support hole 522. A collar member 525 having a through hole coaxially arranged and fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the main body plate portion 521, and the other end portion (left end in front view) of the main body plate portion 521 are bored in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 supports the shaft through the collar. And the other side shaft support hole 526, a pair of fastening hole portions 527 including a pair of fastening holes 527a1 and 527b1 arranged near the other end of the main body plate portion 521 and bored in the front-rear direction, and the fastening hole portion. A bridge member 528 into which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted and fastened and fixed to 527 is mainly provided.

  The main body plate portion 521 is provided at one end portion (right end portion in FIG. 40) with a raised portion 521a that is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed to the tip end.

  The gear portion 523 is a portion meshed with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the drive device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that is provided on the front side.

  In this embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear teeth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily have to cover the entire gear teeth 523, and is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a does not cover the second gear portion. 553b can be contacted, and wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

  The sensor passage plate 524 is a member disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. 524a and a sensor passage plate portion 524b extending from the fastening portion 524a in the assembled state in the radial direction centering on the one-side shaft support hole 522 are mainly provided.

  The sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that is disposed so as to face the side surface on the front side of the front plate member 560 and that passes through the inside of the photo sensor 514. Here, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passage plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560, so that the first arm member 520 of the drive side arm 520 Shaft tilt with respect to the biaxial portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that can detect that the drive-side arm member 520 has been placed in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photo sensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used both for increasing the resistance force against the deformation (axial tilt) of the drive side arm member 520 and for detecting the posture of the drive side arm member 520.

  The collar member 525 is a plate-shaped member whose outer shape is formed into a substantially rhombus shape with rounded corners, and has a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape whose diameter is the end portion in the lateral direction of the outer shape, and its main body. An outer fitting hole 525b formed in the center of the portion 525a, a pair of fastening portions 525c arranged on both left and right sides of the main body portion 525a and having tapered tips and fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 521. Mainly equipped with.

  The pair of fastening hole portions 527 include a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridging member 528a is fixed and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridging member 528b is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the side of the drive-side arm member 520 on the other side shaft support portion 526 (the side on which the moving member 540 is disposed). It is possible to secure a long distance from the support hole 522. Therefore, as will be described later, even when the driven-side arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridging member 528 and the driving-side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is caused by the fastening hole 527 and the one-side shaft support hole 522. It can be generated by using a long distance in the portion between and (the twist angle per a predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, the load applied to the second shaft portion 512b from the one-side shaft support hole 522 (the load in the direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is tilted and folded) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

  The first fastening hole 527a is formed by adjoining the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridging member 528a is fastened, and the auxiliary projecting portion 528a3 is inserted. And a first pin fastening hole 527a2 in which the first bridging member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

  The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .

  The second fastening hole 527b is formed by adjoining the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridging member 528b is fastened, the second fastening hole 527b1, and the auxiliary projection 528b3. A second pin fastening hole 527b2 in which the second bridging member 528b is non-rotatably fixed, and a base portion 527b3 formed by raising the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 to the front side. , Is provided.

  The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the driving side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). . That is, when the second bridging member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive-side arm member 520 is set in the twist direction (the rotation direction about the longitudinal direction of the drive-side arm member 520). It can be divided by the bending direction (the direction in which the driving side arm member 520 bends to the front side). Accordingly, when the second bridging member 528b receives a load from the driven-side arm member 530 and bends and deforms, the driving-side arm member 520 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed about the longitudinal direction.

  The bridging member 528 is arranged on the opposite side of the other-side shaft supporting portion 526 with the first bridging member 528a arranged near the other-side shaft supporting portion 526 and the first bridging member 528a. In addition, a second bridging member 528b is formed that is larger (longer and wider in the lateral direction) than the first bridging member 528a.

  The first bridging member 528a has a main body portion 528a1 formed in an elongated plate shape, an insertion portion 528a2 that is inserted into the first fastening hole 527a1 and is fastened and fixed, and a protrusion provided adjacent to the insertion portion 528a2. Auxiliary protrusion 528a3, a rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge near the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581a1 and protruding toward the back side, and the end portion of the rib portion 528a4. The main part mainly includes an inclined portion 528a5 inclined with respect to the protruding direction.

  The main body portion 528a1 is formed in a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion that is inserted into a first pin fastening hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is attached to the main body plate portion 521. Supported by two points. Therefore, the bridging member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  Since the rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, the rib portion 528a4 suppresses contact with the driven side arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). The member 530 is formed so as to easily abut. The details will be described later.

  The second bridging member 528b is provided with a main body portion 528b1 formed in the shape of an elongated plate, an insertion portion 528b2 that is inserted into the second fastening hole 527b1 and is fastened and fixed, and a protrusion provided adjacent to the insertion portion 528b2. The auxiliary protrusion 528b3, the rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge on the side closer to the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581b1, and protruding toward the back side, and the end portion of the rib portion 528b4. An inclined portion 528b5 that inclines with respect to the projecting direction is mainly provided.

  The main body portion 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion that is inserted into a second pin fastening hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. Supported by two points. Therefore, the bridging member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

  Since the rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, the rib portion 528b4 suppresses contact with the driven side arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). The member 530 is formed so as to easily abut. The details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridging member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven side arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion of the main body portion 528b1 (see FIG. 41) fastened to the driving side arm member 520. It is formed narrower. Thereby, when the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridging member 528b, it is possible to prevent the second bridging member 528b from twisting about the longitudinal direction (flexing along the longitudinal direction. It can be made easier).

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second bridging member 528b from being twisted and deformed by the contact between the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b, and the deformation mode can be limited. In this case, the arrangement position of the portion (the second pin fastening hole 527b2) that prevents the second bridging member 528b from being turned over can be limited, so that the configuration of the second bridging member 528b can be simplified. . That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the lateral direction of the second bridging member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

  The driven-side arm member 530 is a member made of a resin material, and is a body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the body plate portion 531 (the end portion on the right side in front view). ) In the front-rear direction, the one-side shaft support hole 532 into which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted, and the other end portion (the end portion on the left side in front view) of the main body plate portion 531 are formed in the front-rear direction. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is mainly provided with the other side shaft support hole 533 which is supported by a collar.

  The body plate portion 531 is formed such that the front side surface is flush with the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

  The moving member 540 is formed in a block shape that is long in the left-right direction and has a main body 541 whose upper surface is formed by a curved surface having a downward convex shape, and a cylindrical projection on the rear side on the right side of the main body 541 in a rear view. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 that are provided and an alignment portion 543 that projects from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since the moving member 540 is formed so as to be thicker toward the side (the right side in FIG. 42A) where the pair of moving members 540 contact, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is moved by the pair of moving members. It is formed on the side where the member 540 abuts and is formed at a position separated from the driven side arm member 530 to the front side (see FIG. 42).

  The shaft support portion 542 is formed with the same axial distance as the axial distance between the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. 38, the relative arrangement of the pair of shafts is first. The shaft 512a and the second shaft 512b are formed of a pair of shafts having the same arrangement of the shafts as each other, and mainly include a first shaft 542a and a second shaft 542b in order from the top.

  The first shaft portion 542a is a portion that is inserted into the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted into the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. It is the part that

  Here, as described above, the axial distance between the shaft supporting holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the axial distance between the shaft supporting holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 are equal to each other. To be the same. In addition, the relative arrangement of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b arranged on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b arranged on the moving member 540 is arranged. The relationship (direction and distance of straight line connecting axes) is the same. Therefore, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 form a parallel link, and the posture of the moving member 540 does not change during the swing of the driving side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

  The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship between the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is arranged at the projecting position. The moving member 540 on the right side in front view (see FIG. 8) is formed with a recess that is recessed to receive the alignment portion 543 of the moving member 540 on the left side.

  The drive device 550 includes a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the back side, a drive gear 552 axially supported by the drive motor 551, and a drive gear 552. The transmission gear 553 is mainly provided in which the first gear portion 553a of the second stage is meshed with the second gear portion 553b of the second stage is meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive-side arm member 520.

  The transmission gear 553 is a member in which gear teeth of two stages having different diameters are coaxially formed, and includes a first gear portion 553a formed of a large-diameter gear arranged to face the base member 510 and a first gear portion 553a thereof. A second gear portion 553b formed of a gear having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 553a arranged on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and drilled at the centers of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. And a shaft support hole 553c that is supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

  The front plate member 560 includes a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed in the same arrangement as that of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524 a of the sensor passage plate 524. And a guide hole portion 563 that is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of.

  The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each cylinder of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip end of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. As a result, both ends of the shaft support 512 can be supported, and the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operations of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped long hole into which the raised portion 521a protruding from the drive side arm member 520 toward the sensor passage plate 524 is inserted, and is extended in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion. And a stopper wall portion 563a. As a result, even if the drive-side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive-side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and its movement is restricted. The position of the driving side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

  The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond its movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the projecting position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right of the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall portion 563a is brought into contact with the sensor passage plate 524 and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed. It The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only on the front side but also on the back side. This makes it possible to increase the contact area between one end of the drive-side arm member 520 and the stopper wall 563a, and the sensor passage plate 524 and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the time of contact. The stress applied to the can be reduced.

  With reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the end portion of the movable range of the swing motion unit 500 will be described. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the swing motion unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the swing motion unit 500 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 illustrates the moving member 540 in the retracted position, and FIG. 43 illustrates the moving member 540 in the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 does not change when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (when both are swung to the overhang position), the side surfaces (the right side surface in FIG. 43) that are arranged to face each other remain parallel to each other. Since they are brought close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the pair of moving members 540 by fitting the positioning portion 543.

  The bridging member 528 covers the front side surface of the driven-side arm member 530 in a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the projecting position. Further, since the gap between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the extended position. As a result, the swinging of the driving side arm member 520 can be stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (the right side in FIG. 42) on which the pair of moving members 540 abut in the left-right direction, and In the direction, the driving-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 are formed separately.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the bridging member 528 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended so as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening portion between the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b will be described. Due to the difference in the fastening position, the easiness of turning over the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b from the drive-side arm member 520 is different.

  Here, “turning up” means that the bridging member 528 receives a force from the driven side arm member 530 toward the upper side in FIG. 44, and peels off from the driving side arm member 520.

  44A is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520, the driven-side arm member 530, and the first bridging member 528a taken along line XXXIVIVa-XXXXIVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 44B is XXXXXIVb in FIG. 43. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the driving side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the second bridging member 528b taken along the line -XXXXIVb.

  First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44B, the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 that receive the second bridging member 528b differ from the first fastening hole portion 527a. The base 527b3 is formed. As a result, the second embedding width Wb1 that is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1 is longer than the first embedding width Wa1 that is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. To be done. Therefore, the second bridging member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridging member 528a (the second bridging member 528b is more difficult to turn over than the first bridging member 528a).

  The second difference is that the first overhang width Wa2, which is the extension width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state, is the extension width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is made shorter than the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, as compared with the first bridging member 528a, the second bridging member 528b can suppress the deformation near the fastening position (the second bridging member 528b is more effective than the first bridging member 528a. It's hard to turn over in comparison).

  As a third difference, the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44 (a)), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is The 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven side arm member 530 (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  In this case, fastening when the driven-side arm member 530 moves (bends and falls) in the direction approaching the bridging member 528 (upward in FIG. 44), and a load is applied from the driven-side arm member 530 to the bridging member. There is a difference in how to endure in the part.

  That is, when the first bridging member 528a is pushed by the driven-side arm member 530 and the main body 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2 as a starting point, the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 separates from the driving-side arm member 520 (see FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, due to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner side surface of the first pin fastening hole 527a2, a resistance force against the curling of the main body portion 528a1 occurs.

  On the other hand, when the second bridging member 528b is pushed by the driven arm member 530 and the main body portion 528b1 bends from the insertion portion 528b2 as a starting point, the seat surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is pressed against the driving arm member 520. It moves in the direction indicated by the arrow (see FIG. 44B). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pin fastening hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 44 (b)) of the main body plate portion 521. By being pressed against, the body portion 528b1 has a resistance against turning over.

  Therefore, the resistance of the second bridging member 528b to the curling can be increased as compared with the resistance of the first bridging member 528a to the curling.

  The axial distance between the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed longer than the axial distance between the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

  Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, a similar load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to the first bridging member 528a or the second bridging member 528b toward the front side (upward in FIG. 44). In such a case, the second bridging member 528b has a resistance force at the base portion against curling (a force that can endure turning at the fastening position with the driving side arm member 520) as compared with the first bridging member 528a. growing.

  With reference to FIG. 45, an aspect of contact between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 when the driven side arm member 530 flexibly deforms will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swing motion unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVa in FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) show the driven side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 7 is a partial side view of the swing motion unit 500, showing in time series how the arm member 530 bends to the front side.

  Note that FIG. 45 (a) shows a state in which the longitudinal directions of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel to each other, and in FIG. 45 (b), the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). (B) The left side) shows the state of contact with the first bridging member 528a. In FIG. 45 (c), the driven arm member 530 further bends to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). The state of contact with the bridging member 528b is shown. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridging member 528a is arranged closer to the moving member 540 than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven-side arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to the weight of the moving member 540, contact with other members, or the like, the first bridge is first sent when the amount of bending is small. The driven arm member 530 abuts on the hanging member 528a (see FIG. 45 (b)). After that, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridging member 528a is bent and deformed, and the second bridging member 528b contacts the driven side arm member 530 (see FIG. 45 (c)).

  That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 is larger at the portion in contact with the first bridging member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridging member 528a than to the second bridging member 528b. To be

  Here, when the resistance to the bending deformation of the first bridging member 528a is as large as that of the second bridging member 528b, the first bridging member 528a is flexibly deformed even if the amount of bending of the driven-side arm member 530 is large. There is a possibility that it will not be performed (instead, the driving side arm member 520 will bend). In this case, the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and only the first bridging member 528a receives the load from the driven side arm member 530 by itself, resulting in the first bridging member 528a. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridging member 528a is fastened to the drive-side arm member 520 in a manner that the root portion of the first bridging member 528a is easier to flip over than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is easily turned over before the driven-side arm member 530 contacts the second bridging member 528b (deforms with respect to the driving-side arm member 520 near the root).

  In addition, the width of the first bridging member 528a in the lateral direction is narrower than that of the second bridging member 528b, and the plate thickness is the same (see FIG. 44). That is, the section modulus of the second bridging member 528b in the same direction is larger than that of the first bridging member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven-side arm member 530 to the bridging member 528. To be done. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is more likely to bend in the short-side vertical direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 45 (a)) than the second bridging member 528b.

  This allows the pair of bridging members 528 to abut the driven arm member 530 to receive the load (see FIG. 45 (c)), and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridging members 528 to bear the load. Therefore, the durability of the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can be improved.

  The method of receiving the load from the driven-side arm member 530 on the pair of bridging members 528 is not limited to bending the first bridging member 528a. For example, by making the first overhanging width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridging member 528a longer than that in the present embodiment, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge in the bending amount of FIG. It is also possible that the pair of bridging members 528 start to come into contact with the driven-side arm member 530 at the same time with the amount of bending shown in FIG. 45C, without contacting the bridging member 528a. In this case, both the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load can be applied to the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b. Can be distributed to and burdened.

  On the other hand, when the amount of bending is small (see FIG. 45B), the driven-side arm member 530 does not contact any of the pair of bridging members 528, so it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven-side arm member 530. (Until the amount of flexure in FIG. 45C is reached, the flexure is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven arm member 530).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven side arm member 530 into contact with the first bridging member 528a (FIG. 45). (See (b)). Moreover, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven-side arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridging member 528a is flexibly deformed, and the driven-side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the pair of bridging members 528 can receive the load from the driven-side arm member 530, and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridging members 528 to be borne by the pair of bridging members 528a and 528a. The durability of the second bridging member 528b can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship between the drive-side arm member 520, the driven-side arm member 530, and the bridging member 528 will be described. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 taken along the line XXXXXIV-XXXXIV in FIG. 43. Note that, in FIG. 46, in order to facilitate understanding, only a cross-sectional view of a long portion of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 is shown, and the shape of the end portion of each arm member 520, 530 is omitted. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the driving-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 have front side surfaces (side surfaces on the upper side in FIG. 46) formed in substantially the same plane, and the bridging member 528 is the driven-side arm member 530. On the front side of. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or tilt deformation), and the driving side arm member 520 moves to the back side along the arrow B2 (bending deformation or tilt deformation). Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating (torsionally deforming) along the arrow B3. That is, by bringing the bridging member 528 and the driven-side arm member 530 into contact with each other, relative movement (deformation) of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is arranged on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See Figure 42). As described above, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side (the right side in FIG. 43) with which the pair of moving members 540 abut, so that the driven side arm member 530 is more forward than the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven-side arm member 530 falls forward, the bridging member 528 supports (contacts) the driven-side arm member 530 from the front side. Accordingly, the driven-side arm member 530 can be restrained from moving to the front side (the front side in FIG. 43), and accordingly, the moving member 540 can be restrained from moving to the front side.

  Since the driving side arm member 520 is a member to which the driving force is transmitted, the driving side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the degree of the transmission. The wobbling can be suppressed by the contact between the bridging member 528 and the driven-side arm member 530.

  On the other hand, when the drive-side arm member 520 moves toward the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation) or rotates clockwise (twisting deformation) in the opposite direction of the arrow B3, Since the bridging member 528 is moved in the direction away from the driven-side arm member 530, it is difficult to suppress the movement of the driving-side arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable to have a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, referring to FIG. 47, it is possible to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from moving to the front side along the arrow B1 (flexing movement or falling deformation), or to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from moving in the opposite direction of the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (twisting deformation) will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swing motion unit 500 taken along the line XXXXXXV-XXXXV in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the driving side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side in FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 abuts from the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a abuts from the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the driving side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the driving arm member 520. (See FIGS. 48 to 50).

  Therefore, when the side of the drive-side arm member 520 that is close to the driven-side arm member 530 moves to the front side (torsionly deforms in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 presses against the first gear portion 553a. And the umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction in which it is pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the driving side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (twisting deformation) of the driving side arm member 520 in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passage plate 524 is disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, when the other end portion (right side in FIG. 47) of the drive-side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation), one end that sandwiches the second shaft portion 512b. When the sensor passage plate 524 comes into contact with the front plate member 560 in the section, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 from moving (bending deformation or falling deformation) in the arrow B1 direction.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed with a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the collar member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end of the driving side arm member 520 in a front view, so that the collar member 525 allows the base member 510 and the driving side arm member to be formed. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, contact resistance when swinging the drive-side arm member 520 can be suppressed, and the size of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the swinging operation of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described. 48 to 50 are front views of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. Note that, in FIG. 48, the state in which the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 are arranged in the retracted position is the same as in FIG. 42. In FIG. 50 shows the state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 50 shows the state in which the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 are arranged in the extended position, as in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the sensor passing plate 524 is omitted, and a part of the collar member 525 and the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 is a hidden line. While being illustrated, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted and the gear teeth are visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, as the bridging member 528 covers the driven-side arm member 530 from the retracted position to the extended position, the area of the driven-side arm member 530 covered by the bridging member 528 moves to the front side and contacts the bridging member 528. The resistance force generated by the bridging member 528 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b have one side shaft supporting hole 532 and the other side shaft supporting hole 532 of the driven side arm member 530. 533 is formed below the straight line connecting the lines. Therefore, in the retracted position, there is a possibility that the portion above the straight line connecting the one-side shaft support hole 532 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 may change its posture in such a manner as to fall to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between 530 and the bridging member 528 can be kept large. Accordingly, when the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven-side arm member 530 tilts forward and comes into contact with the bridging member 528, so that the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 520. It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are arranged at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the driven side arm member 530. . Therefore, in the projecting position, the distance between the driven-side arm member 530 and the bridging member 528, which may change its posture in a manner in which the one-sided shaft support portion 532 is tilted and deformed, can be narrowed. As a result, at the extended position, the driven-side arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the small deformation amount of the tilting deformation of the driven-side arm member 530.

  That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress swing resistance when the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven-side arm member 530 is arranged in the extended position. In this state, the driven-side arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from within a small amount of deformation of the driven-side arm member 530.

  Further, at least a part of the bridging member 528 is arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530 while the driving-side arm member 520 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position. . Accordingly, the driven-side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction while the bridging member 528 is not arranged on the front side of the driven-side arm member 530, and the side surface of the driven-side arm member 530 that is arranged to face the drive-side arm member 520. It is possible to prevent the bridge member 528 from coming into contact with each other. Further, since the driven side arm member 530 can always contact the bridging member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial displacement of the driven side arm member 530 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the moving member 540 is arranged in the projecting position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are the sides on which the pair of moving members 540 are in contact (the right side in FIG. 50). Take a posture inclined to the opposite side of. Therefore, it may be necessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 in order to maintain the disposition of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in a front view).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (the right side in FIG. 50) where the pair of moving members 540 abut. Therefore, in the state where the moving member 540 is arranged in the projecting position, the driving-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction in a front view. This can prevent the drive-side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise in a front view, and thus it is unnecessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 in a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  The transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the driving side arm member 520 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, as described above. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the mutual contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side in FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

  That is, the driving force necessary for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not limited to the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but also the side surface of the first gear portion 553a on the front side (front side in FIG. 48) and the gear. It can also be transmitted by contact with the back side surface of the portion 523. This can be rephrased as that the swing resistance of the driving side arm member 520 is reduced. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 is provided with a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a transverse direction which is a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. The driving arm member 520 is fastened and fixed. Accordingly, as compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact with each other along the lateral direction of the driving side arm member 520, the collar member 525 and the base member 520 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the driving side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is increased.

  Therefore, the other end portion (the end portion on the left side in FIG. 48) of the drive side arm member 520 starts in the front-back direction (see FIG. 40) from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40) inserted into the one-side shaft support hole 522. It is possible to increase the range in which the collar member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) when it is deformed by bending in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). Thereby, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

  The straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 always intersects with the circular outer shape of the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. Thereby, the axial distance between the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to the minimum length.

  In other words, since it is not necessary to insert the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear. The distance between the central axis of 553 and the central axis can be shortened. This inter-axis distance is set to a distance at least in which the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

  In addition, even when the axial distance between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 is the same, when the fastening portion 525c enters between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area in the axial direction between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the driving side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a swing motion unit 2500 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the end of the bridging member 528 of the swing motion unit 500 is not fixed is described. However, in the swing motion unit 2500 in the second embodiment, the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560 is A thickened portion 2561a for accommodating the tip of the bridging member 2528 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  51A and 51B are partial front views of the swing motion unit 2500 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 51 (b) illustrates a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the extended position. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the main body portion 2528a of the bridging member 2528 is formed across the width direction of the driven side arm member 530. Thus, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (front side in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that abuts the driven side arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be enlarged in comparison, and the movement of the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  The main body 2561 of the front plate member 2560 has a thickened portion 2561a formed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end portion, and a recessed portion downward from the upper end surface of the thickened portion 2561a. And an accommodating portion 2561b.

  The accommodating portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state in which the four sides are closed in a top view, and is a recess that accommodates the tip end portion of the bridging member 2528 in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the projecting position. Is. The inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b includes a mode in which the movement locus of the tip portion of the bridging member 2528 (the tip portion on the upper side in FIG. 51A) is included (the tip portion of the bridging member 2528 is moved during movement of the moving member 540). It is formed such that it does not contact the inner surface of the housing portion 2561b). This prevents the bridging member 2528 from contacting the inner side surface of the drive side arm member 2520 in the rotation direction of the inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b during the movement of the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the extended position. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 51B, the end portion of the bridging member 2528 is housed in the housing portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, for example, when the driven arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) to apply a load to the bridging member 2528, the resistance force to the load can be improved.

  That is, when the tip of the bridging member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridging member 2528 cantilever-supports the load from the driven-side arm member 530 (the load facing the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridging member 2528 is fastened to the driving side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the tip of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force against the load from the driven-side arm member 530 can be generated by double-sided support (fastening with the drive-side arm 2520). Position and the receiving portion 2561b). This can prevent the driven arm member 530 from moving to the front side.

  Further, since the bridging member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 2520, the front end of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, whereby the drive side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  In this case, the moving members 540 of the rocking motion unit 2500 formed in a pair of left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 8). In the above, it is possible to prevent relative displacement of the pair of moving members 540 in the front-rear direction. Since the housing portion 2561b is arranged at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) of the pair of moving members 540 compared to the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 that are generated with the housing portion 2561b as a starting point are included. It is possible to reduce the positional deviation of.

  Thereby, the effect of correcting the positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 can be ensured, and the pair of moving members 540 are integrally viewed in the state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the projecting position, thereby producing the effect. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a swing motion unit 3500 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the driving side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described. However, the swing motion unit 3500 in the third embodiment extends outward from the umbrella portion 523a. The projecting portion 3523b is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the swing motion unit 3500 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a swing along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit 3500. In FIG. 52, for easy understanding, only the base member 3510, the driving side arm member 3520, and the driving device 550 are illustrated, and the other members are omitted, and the photo sensor 514 and the driving unit 530 of the base member 3510 are omitted. Illustration of the sensor passage plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 52A shows a state in which the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged in the retracted position, and in FIG. 52B, the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member. 540 (see FIG. 7) is shown rotated from the retracted position by a predetermined angle, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged in the extended position. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the drive-side arm member 3520 includes a projecting portion 3523b extending outward from the umbrella portion 523a in the axial radial direction. The protruding portion 3523b is arranged below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the driving side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52B). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive-side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is arranged to face the rear surface side of the protruding portion 3523b.

  The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 that is curved and formed along the outer periphery of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial radial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the side surface of the second gear 553b of the transmission gear 553 on the front side (see FIG. 52 (d)).

  From these, it is possible to suppress the drive-side arm member 3520 from moving (tilting or bending) from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512 to the front side. That is, the drive-side arm member 3520 moves (falls or bends) toward the front side above the second shaft portion 512b by the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and below the second shaft portion 512b. In, it moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a contacting the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhanging portion 3523b contacts the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. Accordingly, the movement (tilt deformation or bending deformation) of the drive side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by the contact at the two positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the drive-side arm member 3520 is arranged in the projecting position, compared with the case where the drive-side arm member 3520 is arranged in another position, the drive-side arm member 3520. The abutting position of 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial radial direction.

  That is, when the driving side arm member 3520 is arranged at the projecting position, the umbrella portion 523a is arranged so as to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the projecting portion 3523b is arranged at the second gear portion. 553b is arranged opposite to the front side surface of the main body portion. In this case, the projecting portion 3523b can contact the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement cannot be seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

  Further, in the state in which the drive-side arm member 3520 is arranged in the projecting position, since the longitudinal direction of the drive-side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) causes the drive-side arm member 3520 to move. This is a state in which the movement in the front-rear direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) easily occurs with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the abutting position of the drive-side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial radial direction. It is possible to increase the resistance to the movement of 3520 in the front-rear direction and suppress the movement.

  Next, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth long hole without catching has been described. However, in the combined operation unit 4400 of the fourth embodiment, the concave portion is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. 53 and 54, the collar member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body portion 410 of the combined operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is placed at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b. Contact. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b arranged immediately above the abutting position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is equal to or larger than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves down from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d arranged at the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and bounces back, the shaft support hole 423d bounces up and down. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also bounces upward due to the momentum of rebound in the vertical direction.

  The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. In FIG. 54 (a), a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b is shown, and in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is shown. The state immediately after contacting the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. Note that, in FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are omitted for easy understanding, and the slide shaft portion 423e and the end portion on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e in the moving direction. Are indicated by arrows C41 to C44.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft portion is moved downward. 423e contacts the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not housed in the recessed portion 4424c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, and the end portion of the connecting member 423 on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e follows the arrow C44. When it bounces upwards, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is housed in the recessed portion 4424c.

  Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction that is the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated with respect to the slide shaft portion 423e that is moving in the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b.

  This can prevent the slide shaft portion 423e from moving along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebounding width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the drive device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven in the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, a composite operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the end of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described. However, in the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment, the slide of the connecting member 5423 is performed. A plate spring member 5425, which is a plate-shaped spring member, is formed so as to come into contact with the end portion on the side of the shaft portion 423e. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. As the body member 410 moves down from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

  The connecting member 5423 includes a protruding portion 5423f protruding from the end of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft 423e side. The projecting portion 5423f is projected vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 arranged at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, and at the same time, when viewed from the rear side (FIG. 56 (c)). The corner on the right side is rounded and the corner on the left side in rear view is formed as a right angle.

  The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c that is provided in a U-shape so as to project on the rear surface side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer ends of the pair of guide holes 424b. The grip portion 5424c is formed such that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction, and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

  The leaf spring member 5425 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is illustrated in chronological order, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side in rear view is partially illustrated. 56), the state in which the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is arranged at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 56 (b), the state in which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position toward the intermediate position by a predetermined distance is shown in FIG. In c), the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position is illustrated.

  Note that, for ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the plate spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are omitted. Further, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 are shown only in outer shape, and illustration of internal patterns and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the lengthwise direction is oriented in the left-right direction, and one end of the plate spring member 5425 is a straight plate-shaped fixed portion 5425 a held by the gripping portion 5424 c. And a curved portion 5425b that is connected to the other end of the fixed portion 5425a and that is curvedly formed so as to project toward the coupling member side, and the left and right direction from the inner end of the curved portion 5425b (the right side in FIG. 56A). And a fall prevention unit 5425c that is extended to

  The curved portion 5425b is formed such that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed outside in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed inside in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is rapidly inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to nearly a right angle).

  The fall prevention portion 5425c is brought into contact with the upper end portion of the protruding portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c may hang downward due to deterioration over time, in the state of FIG. 56 (c), the protruding portion 5423f causes the leaf spring member 5425 to move downward. Since it is lifted, the positional relationship between the leaf spring member 5425 and the protruding portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c from hanging downward.

  Here, the change in the direction of the force generated between the protruding portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, so that between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves toward the inner side of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the protruding portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. They gradually come close to each other and eventually come into contact with each other (see FIG. 56 (b)). Subsequently, the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the protruding portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (the right end side of FIG. 56B) is moved. The edge gradually moves upward.

  When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the plate spring member 5425 contact each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the plate spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. Is transmitted in the normal direction. That is, the force F51 is directed in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction of bending the leaf spring member 5425. In this case, of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51, the component directed in the left-right direction is small, so that when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves to the right, the leaf spring member 5425 causes It is suppressed that the movement of the connecting member 5423 is hindered. As a result, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55) until the body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position. can do.

  When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the end portion on the inner side in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56 (c)) and rebounds, the protruding portion 5423f causes the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 to bend. The second inclined surface 5425b2 is brought into contact (see FIG. 56 (c)).

  In this case, the force F52 applied to the leaf spring member 5425 from the protruding portion 5423f is transmitted in the direction normal to the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the curved portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Here, the leaf spring is easily elastically deformed in the thickness direction, but is not easily elastically deformed in the longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the bending portion 5425b to be close to the right-left direction. Accordingly, the resistance force of the leaf spring member 5425 against the rebound of the connecting member 5423 can be increased, and the connecting member 5423 can be prevented from moving. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end portion inside the guide hole 424b (right side in FIG. 56C).

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion 5423f is chamfered with a rounded corner on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 56 (c)), and the corner on the left side in rear view is formed at a right angle. Accordingly, when the corner on the right side in rear view of the protruding portion 5423f abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56 (b)), it abuts smoothly (without biting) and the left side in rear view of the protruding portion 5423f is seen. When the corner comes into contact with the plate spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56C), the protruding portion 5423f bites into the plate spring member 5425. That is, the corner of the protruding portion 5423f on the left side in rear view fits between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the plate spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

  By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the drive device 460 (see FIG. 21), the slide shaft portion 423e is driven in the guide hole 4424b along the left-right direction. In this case, the protruding portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, a composite operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 that guides the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding has been described. However, in the composite operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 that guides the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Is formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the projecting position. Note that FIG. 57 shows the wiring guide slide 6480 in an expanded state. When the wiring guide slide 6480 is in the extended state, the wiring W disposed inside the wiring guide slide 6480 has few places to be bent and is formed substantially linearly. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The wiring guide slide 6480 includes a first guide slide 6481 through which the wiring W is inserted so as to be swingably supported about the shaft supporting portion 472, and a slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. A second guide slide 6482 that is slid along and has the wiring W inserted therein, and a third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and that has the wiring W inserted therein. The slide 6483 is mainly provided.

  The first guide slide 6481 includes a rectangular tubular main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in front and rear sides) that are arranged to face each other within the side surface of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide elongated holes 6481b formed facing each other on the side surface) and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6481a, and the shaft support portion 472 is inserted through the end portion of the main body portion 6481a in the front-rear direction. Mainly includes a shaft support hole 6481c and a columnar portion 6481d that bridges in the front-rear direction to the lower end of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

  The extending direction of the elongated slide hole 6481b and the side surface below the main body portion 6481a (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) are formed in parallel. The wiring W is wound around the columnar portion 6481d from below.

  The second guide slide 6482 has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6482a in which the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6481 is slidably fitted and a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and the main body portion 6482a. A pair of slide elongated holes 6482b formed facing each other in a pair of side surfaces (side surfaces arranged in front and back) of the main body portion 6482a and a main body portion 6482a. Mainly includes a pair of protruding portions 6482c protruding outward from the front and rear side surfaces and inserted into the slide elongated holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6481.

  The extending direction of the elongated slide hole 6482b and the lower side surface of the main body portion 6482a (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) are formed in parallel. The protruding portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide elongated hole 6481b.

  In the second guide slide 6482, the protruding portion 6482c is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481, and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is kept in the main body portion 6481a during the movement. Is abutted on the inner surface of the through hole 6481a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a is from the central axis of the protruding portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. The distance between the lower side surface and the outer surface is substantially equal to the distance. Thereby, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6481, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  The third guide slide 6483 is a rectangular cylindrical main body 6483a in which the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 is slidably fitted and a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and its main body. It mainly includes a pair of protruding portions 6483b protruding outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and inserted into the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

  The protruding portion 6483b of the third guide slide 6483 is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482. During the movement, the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 has the main body portion 6482a. Is abutted on the inner surface of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is from the central axis of the protruding portion 6483b to the main body portion 6483a. The distance between the lower side surface and the outer surface is substantially equal to the distance. Accordingly, when the third guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482, the attitude of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  Here, the inner surface of the first guide slide 6481 and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 are formed as smooth surfaces, respectively, while the inner surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 are formed. It is formed with a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

  As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides in preference to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first accommodated in the first guide slide 6481, and after the accommodation is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is accommodated. 6483 is stored.

  58A and 58B are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. It should be noted that FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. It

  As shown in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion where the wiring W may be sandwiched, and thus the wiring W can be prevented from being broken. Further, since there is no fear of sandwiching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surface of each of the guide slides 6481, 6482, 6483 can be reduced. Thereby, the width of the wiring guide slide 6480 in the lateral direction can be suppressed.

  The wiring W is left inside the wiring guide slide 6480 in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W can be temporarily removed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a swing motion unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridging members 528 are fixed to the drive side arm member 520 has been described, but the swing motion unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridging members 7528. The hanging member 7528a is swingably formed with respect to the driving side arm member 7520. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial front views of the swing motion unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment. 59 (a) shows the moving member 540 in the retracted position, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the moving member 540 in the extended position. Is shown in phantom.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridging member 7528 a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is provided in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown) in a front view. The main body plate portion 7521 is the same as the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridging member 7528a is omitted and the shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. Formed similarly. The second bridging member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

  The driven-side arm member 7530 is provided with a protruding portion 7534 that protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and that abuts on the first bridging member 7528a in the swinging direction.

  Here, the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are arranged relative to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534 in a state in which the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are arranged in the retracted position and a state in which the driven-side arm member 7530 is arranged in the extended position. The position is changed (the position is changed similarly to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520).

  By swinging the first bridging member 7528a along the protruding portion 7534, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b is increased at the projecting position (see FIG. 59 (b)). Can be expanded. Thereby, when the driven-side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where the bridging member 7528 can contact (the ends of the first bridging member 7528a and the end of the second bridging member 7528b). Can be extended. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven side arm member 7530 can freely bend without being brought into contact with the bridging member 7528 can be divided into shorter parts, and the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 7530 (in the front-back direction) can be reduced. The amount of movement) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position or the extended position. it can. Here, the displacement of the driven-side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving-side arm member 7520 is likely to occur in the other-side shaft support hole 533 that is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the displacement width is likely to increase. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first bridging member 7528a from separating from the other-side shaft support hole 533, and to increase the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven-side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving-side arm member 7520. You can

  Further, when the driving side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 59 (a)), the first bridging member 7528a is biased by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in a direction approaching the second bridging member 7528b. As a result, the drive-side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b is widened, and the first bridging member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 are separated from each other. Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  Next, a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by being planted on the base plate 8060. Light is irradiated near the upper half of 62. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom in decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed in the embedding hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device 8610 from increasing the thickness of the game board 8013 in the front-rear direction.

  From the light irradiation device 8610, light is emitted to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism for changing the traveling direction of the emitted light to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

  61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 taken along the line LXI-LXI of FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 arranged on the side surface of the main body portion 8611.

  The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed, and the embedded hole 8013a along the back surface of the game board 8013 and below the outer rail 62 ( A projection passage 8013b, which is a recess extending inward of the game area, and an extension end portion of the projection passage 8013b, which is closer to the front side as it goes downward (inward of the game area). A direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner is mainly provided.

  The embedding hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape in a resin mold.

  The path E81 of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 is formed inside the light projecting path 8013b, reaches the direction changing unit 8013c, and is reflected so that the traveling direction of the light is from the path E81 to the front side (FIG. 61). It changes to the route E82 that faces toward the left side. Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of a light-transmissive resin material, it is inconspicuous and can reduce the influence on the decoration of the game area. it can. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling on the route E82 is emitted from below to the nail planted in the front of the game board 8013. As a result, the shadow formed below the nail due to the illumination of the hole can be made bright. Therefore, the performance of the area under the nail can be improved, and the ball can be made easier to see when the ball passes through the area under the nail, and the burden on the player is reduced because the ball is difficult to see. be able to.

  In particular, the nail planted in the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position that can be looked up by the player, so that the light reflected from the nail is directed to the player by being irradiated with light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

  The lower part (lower half part) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, and therefore has little effect on the flow of the ball even if it is processed. For example, by performing a crystal-shaped process on the lower part (lower half) of the nail, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the performance of the nail can be enhanced.

  In addition, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color (for example, red) different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow), it is possible to distinguish the nail irradiated with the light from other nails. You can make it easier.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60) may be arranged on the game board 8013 and light may be sequentially irradiated. That is, light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the left end in front view, and then light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the right side (second from the left end in front view), and then on the right side (front side). Light may be emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in the visual sense), and the light irradiation device 8610 may continue in the same manner thereafter.

  According to this, the nails implanted in the game board 8013 are sequentially illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting device 8610 along the curved arrow R81. For example, when the player is in a game state in which it is advantageous for the player to make a right-handed stroke, the nails planted in the game board 8013 are made to shine in order along the curved arrow R81 so that the player can make a right-handed stroke. Can be signaled to. As a result, the effect of telling the player where to hit the ball is added to the nail forming the flow path of the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

  Note that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, the windmill disposed on the game board 8613 or the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60) may be exposed to light.

  62 to 64, the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except in the pivotal support portion has been described, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment is The overhanging front locking portion 9482f provided on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are not shown for easy understanding.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9481 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. It is a perspective view of a locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially sectioned, and the fitting portion of the attachment portion 9481d and the detachable front locking member 9481f is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 includes a detachable front locking member 9481f that is detachably formed on the attachment portion 9481d, and plate-shaped arm portions 9481a from both ends of the linear portion of the attachment portion 9481d. It mainly includes a plate-shaped non-slip plate portion 9481g that extends toward the other side and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h that extends from the back surface side of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

  In the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a, the formation of the cutout portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. This is because, in the present embodiment, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d as described later, and thus the cutout portion 481a1 is unnecessary. Thereby, the strength of the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 that is a recess having a semicircular cross section and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is a recess having a semicircular cross section into which a cylindrical fitting arm portion 9481f2 of a detachable front locking member 9481f, which will be described later, fits. Direction). Thereby, the shape of the fitting recess 9481d1 is added to the molding die of the fitting part 9481d, and the fitting part 9481d1 is formed by pulling it out in one direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 62 (a)). 9481d can be easily manufactured.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius that is the same as or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. Accordingly, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the detachable front locking member 9481f can be prevented from slidingly moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

  In this case, as compared with the case where the attachment portion 9481d and the fitting arm portion 9481f2 are in flat contact with each other, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be increased and the frictional force can be increased. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from falling off the attachment portion 9481d.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f has a long plate-shaped main body plate portion 9481f1 and a plurality of vertically extending cylindrical columns extending from the side surface in the thickness direction of the main body plate portion 9481f1. And a fitting arm portion 9481f2.

  The detachable front locking member 9481f is detachable from the attachment portion 9481d, so that when the wiring W is replaced, for example, when the wiring W is disconnected, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to remove the removable front locking member. It is possible to save the trouble of replacing the wiring W while avoiding the member 9481f, and to easily replace the wiring W.

  The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions that fix the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged side by side at a distance slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members is continuously provided in two sets. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, the pair of rod-shaped members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are pushed by the attachment portion 9481d to be elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force causes the attachment portion to be attached. The 9481d is clamped.

  The length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed to be slightly longer than the width direction length of the attachment portion 9481f. The protruding portion 9481f3 is formed so as to protrude. When the protruding portion 9481f3 is caught by the attachment portion 9481f, the detachable front locking member 9481f can be prevented from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (front side in FIG. 62A).

  In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a depression having a semicircular cross section. The axis of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought close to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the alignment when attaching the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d, and to reduce the time required for attachment.

  The non-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, and is continuously formed in the width direction of the attachment portion 9481d (vertical direction in FIG. 62B). The attachment portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction. The distance between the tip of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is usually formed to be equal to or less than the thickness of the wiring W, and the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is formed by inserting the wiring W therethrough. It is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force suppresses the wiring W from sliding on the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

  The non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a over the width direction, and the wiring W can be suppressed from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  The pair of anti-slip plate portions 9481g are opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the moving direction of the wiring W. The anti-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to face the rib portion N. Accordingly, the wiring W can be suppressed at the middle portion (antinode) of the non-slip plate portion 9481g, and thus the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

  The other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-shaped portion having the same outer peripheral shape as the other-side bottom portion 481e2, and the other-side cylindrical portion 481c extends from the back surface of the other-side bottom portion 481e2 in the circumferential direction of the other-side cylindrical portion 481c. Is extended about 120 degrees about the axis, and an inclined side surface 9481h1 is provided at the extension tip. Note that, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the extending distal end of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring W from falling off to the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 64 (a)).

  The inclined side surface 9481h1 inclines toward the back surface side (downward in FIG. 62B) as it moves away from the other side bottom portion 481e2.

  63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is a LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a second guide arm 9482 at line LXIIIc.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes a projecting front engaging portion 9482 f extending from the front end of the attachment portion 482 d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482 d, and an attachment portion. A non-slip plate portion 9482g that extends from the ends of the straight portions of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a to the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d that are opposed to each other is mainly provided.

  The overhanging front locking portion 9482f is located on the extended end portion that extends on the opposite side of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d interposed therebetween, and as it approaches the attachment portion 482 from the extended tip, the rear side (FIG. 63). (C) The inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side is provided.

  Since the technical idea of the anti-slip plate portion 9482g is the same as the technical idea of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is LXIVc- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in a LXIVc line. In FIG. 64 (a), the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded is shown, and in FIG. 64 (b), the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are axially rotated to open. The opened state is shown. Further, the wiring W is illustrated in FIGS. 64A and 64B, and the illustration of the wiring W is omitted in FIG. 64C.

  Here, in order to secure the area for disposing the other movable accessory, it is desirable to suppress the area for disposing the wire guide arm 9480. Therefore, it is difficult to allow a region for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a of the first guide arm 9481 and the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, each time the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W rubs against the inner side surface of the wiring guide arm 9480, the wiring W is deteriorated early, and the durability of the wiring W is reduced. It may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 of the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portions 9481g and 9482g and the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, so that the wiring W is moved to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. , 482a and the attachment parts 9481d, 482d are prevented from moving relative to each other. Thereby, the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  Further, when the second guide arm 9482 is deformed in a twisted manner with respect to the first guide arm 9481, the wiring W is also twisted, which may reduce the durability of the wiring W.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h has the second guide arm. The one side bottom portion 482e1 of 9482 is overlapped in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62 (b)).

  Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship capable of abutting in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in the direction in which the one side bottom portion 482e1 is pressed against the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, the one side bottom portion 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other. The deformation resistance of twisting deformation increases. In this case, twisting deformation of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be suppressed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  In the present embodiment, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481 move forward and backward. Direction overlap and are formed in a positional relationship capable of abutting in the front-back direction (see FIG. 64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 twists and deforms with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in the direction of pressing the projecting front locking portion 9482f against the supporting portion 9481d, the projecting front locking portion 9482f and the supporting portion 9481d come into contact with each other. They are brought into contact with each other, and the deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, twisting deformation of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be suppressed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

  Further, when the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the second guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded in the second direction (see FIG. 64 (a)). The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

  In this case, since the back side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9481 and the protruding front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, the back side of the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the second guide arm 9482 is twisted with respect to the first guide arm 9481 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

  The same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to improve the alignment accuracy of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion that suppresses the twisting of the second guide arm 9482 is formed so as to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. The degree of accuracy required can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)) and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64 (a)). Before reaching (b), the extension tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, since the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62A) is formed at the extension tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, the extension tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h contacts the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1. Even when they come into contact with each other, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be ridden on the back side of the one side bottom portion 482e1 (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 64 (b)). Accordingly, it is possible to easily form the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (a)).

  In addition, a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)) from a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (a)). (See), the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

  On the other hand, since the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) is formed at the extending front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, the extending front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f becomes the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be ridden on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 64 (a)) of the attachment portion 9481d (see FIG. 64 (c)). Accordingly, it is possible to easily form the folded state (see FIG. 64A) of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

  In addition, although the case where the protruding front locking portion 9482f that abuts the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front surface side has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair of front and back sides. Accordingly, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the direction of twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twisted and deformed. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation unit 200 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide holes 413 are arranged near the left and right ends of the main body member 410 has been described. However, in the combined operation unit 10400 in the tenth embodiment, the guide holes 10413 are located at the left and right ends of the main body member 10410. It is arranged near the middle position between the left and right centers. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65, the combined operation unit 10400, the swing operation unit 500, and the two-way operation unit 700 are housed inside the outer wall portion 212 of the operation unit 200 according to the tenth embodiment.

  Unlike FIG. 5 of the first embodiment, in FIG. 65, the left member of the pair of left and right cover members is omitted, and thus the leg member 10440 is visible. As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, an urging spring 445 for urging the leg member 10440 to the upper side is arranged in a manner wound around a pulley. Therefore, a spring having a long natural length can be used as the urging spring 445 as compared with the case of performing the straight expansion and contraction operation as in the first embodiment, which allows the urging force with respect to the vertical movement amount of the main body member 10410. The amount of change in can be slow.

  The combined operation unit 10400 is a unit that performs the same operation as the combined operation unit 400 of the first embodiment. The two-way operation unit 700 is an effect unit arranged between the pair of swing operation units 500, and is driven by a single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75) to rotate the disc member 720. It is a unit that performs an effect and an effect by the sliding motion of the operation member 750 in an overlapping region in a front view. Hereinafter, first, the composite operation unit 10400 will be described, and subsequently, the two-way operation unit 700 will be described.

  66 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 10400. 66, the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the retracted position, the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the intermediate position in FIG. 67, and the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the projecting position in FIG. 68. The situation is illustrated. 66 to 68, only the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 is illustrated, and the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 are omitted for ease of understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, the composite operation unit 10400 includes a main body member 10410 that slides vertically, and a shield member that is arranged on the front side of the main body member 10410 and that rotates based on the movement of the main body member 10410. 10420, a swing member 430, a leg member 10440, a guide member 450, a drive device 460, a rear upper plate 470 (see FIG. 21), and a wiring guide arm 480 (see FIG. 21). . The biasing spring 445 is not shown for easy understanding.

  Here, the swinging member 430, the guide member 450, the drive device 460, the rear upper plate 470 (see FIG. 21), and the wiring guide arm 480 (see FIG. 21) are the same as those described in the first embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted. The leg member 10440 will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

  Further, the main body member 10410 and the shield member 10420 also have substantially the same configuration as the main body member 410 and the shield member 420 in the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations.

  The main body member 10410 is different from the main body member 410 in the first embodiment in that the guide hole 10413 is closer to the center position of the main body member 10410 (in the vicinity of each divided position when the main body member 10410 is divided into three in the left-right direction). Will be placed.

  The guide hole 10413 is extended along a straight line having an inclination angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal line and the vertical line, as shown by a hidden line in FIG. 66.

  The shielding member 10420 is different from the shielding member 420 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 corresponds to the arrangement of the guide hole 10413 and is closer to the center position of the main body member 10410 in the assembled state. Is located in.

  In addition, the pair of shielding members 10420 includes a coupling surface S10 that abuts each other when the main body member 10410 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The coupling surface S10 is configured such that the central axis of the shaft support rod 423c is arranged on the surface extending the coupling surface S10. Therefore, the coupling surfaces S10 abut on each other in the surface state when the main body member 10410 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 68).

  Here, the action of gravity applied to the shielding member 10420 will be described. In the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged at the retracted position or the intermediate position (see FIG. 66 or FIG. 67), one of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422, which is a pair of members (left front view in FIG. 66). The center of gravity position G10 of one member (hereinafter, referred to as “one member of the shielding member 10420”) is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the insertion shaft portion 10421c. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67 is one end position (front clockwise direction) in the movement range of one member of the shielding member 10420, and the gravity load is directed to one end position side. .

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or 67, it is possible to prevent the operation of one member of the shielding member 10420 from being disturbed.

  That is, one member of the shielding member 10420 only supports the insertion shaft portion 10421c on the main body member 10410, and therefore, for example, while the main body member 10410 moves (drops) at a high speed from the retracted position to the intermediate position, the shielding is performed. One member of the member 10420 may be left behind due to inertia, and in this state, the insertion shaft portion 10421c may slide in the guide hole 10413, and one member of the shielding member 10420 may move relative to the main body member 10410.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity position G10 is arranged on the side where one member of the shielding member 10420 is gravitationally pushed toward the one end position side with respect to the insertion shaft portion 10421c, and therefore one of the shielding member 10420 is disposed. Even if this member is left behind due to inertia, it is possible to prevent one member of the shielding member 10420 from rotating in the direction opposite to the one end position side (counterclockwise direction in front view).

  Although one member of the shielding member 10420 is also supported by the connecting member 423, at the retracted position and the intermediate position of the main body member 10410 (see FIGS. 66 and 67), the connecting member 423 causes the shielding member 10420 to move. Since one member is not pulled in the vertical direction, the connecting member 423 is not in a relationship of hoisting and supporting one member of the shielding member 10420. Therefore, it can be considered that one member of the shielding member 10420 is supported at one point by the insertion shaft portion 10421c while the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position.

  On the other hand, while the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the connecting member 423 pulls one member of the shielding member 10420. Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a change in the center of gravity position G10 of one member of the shielding member 10420 based on the movement of the main body member 10410 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the main body member 10410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 is arranged at the end (moving end) of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424. Therefore, when the main body member 10410 is moved further downward from the intermediate position, the swinging base member 10421 is lifted because the connecting member 423 cannot move.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68, when the main body member 10410 descends to the projecting position, the postures of the pair of swing base members 10421 change, and a state (contact state) in which the coupling surfaces S10 of each other contact each other is formed. .

  In this embodiment, in the abutting state, the pair of swing base members 10421 gives an effect that makes the player feel as if they were a single large member (a semicircular or semi-donut-shaped member). I'm aiming for that. Therefore, it is desirable to bring them into contact with each other so that no gap is created between the coupling surfaces S10. For this purpose, one member of the above-described shield member 10420 including one member of the swing base member 10421 is rotated in the forward rotation direction CCW1 (counterclockwise direction in front view) around the insertion shaft portion 10421c. It is necessary to generate a load in the direction of doing.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged at the projecting position, the connecting member 423 lifts the swing base member 10421 to generate a load in the forward rotation direction CCW1.

  Therefore, since the weight of the rocking base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 is normally applied to the connecting member 423, the connecting member 423 can be made heavy by making the connecting member 423 strong, and the material of the connecting member 423 can be reduced. The special order causes a problem that the member cost becomes high. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main body member 10410 supports the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421, so that the main body member 10410 may be configured to bear a part of the load applied to the connecting member 423. Therefore, the connecting member 423 can be made of a lightweight and general-purpose material.

  On the other hand, since the swing base member 10421 is configured to be supported by the two members of the connecting member 423 and the main body member 10410 as described above, in the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the projecting position, for example, When the swing base member 10421 receives a load that rotates in the direction opposite to the normal direction CCW1 due to gravity, or when the elastic force of the biasing spring 445 (see FIG. 19) causes a load enough to lift the main body member 10410, There is a possibility that the main body member 10410 slightly moves upward, the swing base member 10421 rotates due to the movement, and the coupling surface S10 is separated.

  Therefore, although it is desired to increase the weight so as to maintain the main body member 10410 at the lower end position of the movement range, if the weight is constantly increased, the driving force of the drive device 460 becomes excessive, which is not desirable. It is also conceivable to maintain the vertical position of the main body member 10410 with the drive motor 462 of the drive device 460 fixed, but in this case, when the operating accessory is arranged at the lowermost end, the power is cut off. Compared with the conventional products that can reduce the power consumption, the power consumption becomes large, which is not desirable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the separated state in which the coupling surface S10 of the swing base member 10421 is separated (see FIG. 66), the gravitational load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 is in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction CCW1. The center-of-gravity position G10 is arranged so as to be in the direction along which the gravity load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 in the contact state (see FIG. 68) is in the direction along the forward rotation direction CCW1 (coupling surface). The center of gravity position G10 is arranged so that S10 is pressed against each other.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 66 (the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the retracted position) and the state shown in FIG. 68 (the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the extended position), a front view is shown. In, the center of gravity position G10 is inverted with the insertion shaft portion 10421c as a boundary. As a result, in the abutting state at the extended position, the swing base member 10421 tries to rotate in the direction to maintain the abutting state due to its own weight, and therefore the load (biasing spring 445) for maintaining the main body member 10410 at the extended position. The drive force generated by the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) can be assisted (see FIG. 65).

  That is, if the biasing spring 445 (see FIG. 65) pulls the main body member 10410 upward and the weights of the main body member 10410 and other members supported by the main body member 10410 are balanced, the main body member 10410 is Although the stop can be continued at the lowermost end, in order to counteract the tensile force of the urging spring 445 when the tension of the urging spring 445 is set high in advance in order to increase the momentum at the time of rising start, It is necessary to apply the driving force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) downward to compensate for the portion of the main body member 10410 and other members supported by the main body member 10410 that weigh less than the tensile force.

  If the heavy object driven by the drive motor is a lump that is not deformed, only the weight is targeted. However, when the swing base member 10421 is displaced relative to the main body member 10410 as in the present embodiment, In addition to the weight of the heavy object (main body member 10410, etc.), it is necessary to generate a force required for resistance during relative displacement.

  In the present embodiment, the center of gravity position G10 of the swing base member 10421 is arranged on the side that suppresses the displacement of the swing base member 10421. Therefore, when the main body member 10410 is maintained at the lowest point, the main body member 10410 and the like. In addition to the weight, the resistance at the time of relative movement of the swing base member 10421 with respect to the main body member 10410 acts as a force that opposes the tensile force of the biasing spring 445. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) for maintaining the main body member 10410 at the lowermost end while setting the tensile force of the biasing spring 445 to a high value in advance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 68, the oscillating base member 10421 has its left and right outer parts downward and its left and right inner part upward due to the gravity load applied to its center of gravity G10 about the insertion shaft 10421c. A moment in the direction of rotation is applied in a moving manner. At this time, an upward load is applied to the connecting portion (the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 69)) between the swing base member 10421 and the connecting member 423 along the circumferential direction of the circle centered on the insertion shaft portion 10421c. To be Therefore, since the downward load applied to the connecting member 423 can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 423 from being damaged.

Further, the horizontal distance between the center of gravity position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c in the state shown in FIG. 68 is equal to or less than the horizontal distance between the center of gravity position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c in the state shown in FIG. To be done. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 68, the horizontal distance between the gravity center position G10 and the insertion shaft portion 10421c becomes the maximum.
As a result, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 66, the state shown in FIG. 68 (during the change from the state of FIG. 66 to the state of FIG. 68) is applied to the swing base member 10421 by gravity. Since the load in the rotation direction can be reduced, the posture of the swing base member 10421 can be easily maintained in the state shown in FIG. 66, and the posture of the swing base member 10421 can be easily changed in the state shown in FIG. 68. .

  Next, the raising operation in which the main body member 10410 moves from the extended position to the intermediate position will be described.

  The insertion shaft portion 10421c moves in the guide hole 10413 based on the raising operation of the main body member 10410. Here, as described above, the inclination angle θ10 of the guide hole 10413 is 45 degrees. Therefore, based on the main body member 10410 moving upward and the insertion shaft portion moving upward by the vertical distance Y10, the insertion shaft portion 10421c horizontally moves by the horizontal distance X10 having the same length as the vertical distance Y10.

  Here, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves in the left-right direction, the vertical distance Y10 matches the vertical movement distance of the main body member 10410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 68, the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves obliquely upward from the left-right direction (in a circular orbit centered on the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 70)). Move along). Therefore, the vertical distance Y10, which is the vertical movement distance of the insertion shaft portion 10421c, can be made shorter than the vertical movement distance of the main body member 10410. As a result, when the main body member 10410 moves upward, the insertion shaft portion 10421c descends relatively to the main body member 10410, so that it is possible to reduce the downward load on the main body member 10410 from the insertion shaft portion 10421c. it can.

  At this time, the operation mode of the ascending movement of the swing base member 10421 is that the pair of swing base members 10421 rotate in a direction in which they are separated from each other with the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 70) whose position does not change as the rotation axis. It becomes a mode.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 are lifted in the same posture, the driving force required by the drive device 460 at the time of starting the lifting of the main body member 10410 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the center of gravity position G10 of one member of the shielding member 10420 is based on the insertion shaft portion 10421c while the main body member 10410 moves from the extended position to the intermediate position (from the state of FIG. 68 to the state of FIG. 67). The left and right positions are changed from left to right. That is, the load due to the own weight of one member of the shielding member 10420 is changed from the state in which the one member of the shielding member 10420 is rotated toward the forward rotation direction CCW1 to the load due to the own weight of one member of the shielding member 10420. , The one of the shielding members 10420 is switched to a state in which the one of the shielding members 10420 is rotated in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction CCW1. Accordingly, when one member of the shielding member 10420 rotates due to the ascending operation of the main body member 10410, the load (operational resistance) applied from the one member of the shielding member 10420 to the main body member 10410 can be reduced. .

  Further, since the position of the shaft support rod 423c does not change, the weight of the connecting member 423 does not become an operation resistance when the main body member 10410 is lifted and started. Therefore, as compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 are lifted together with the connecting member 423, the driving force required by the drive device 460 at the time of starting the ascending of the main body member 10410 can be reduced.

  Here, maintaining the contact state of the coupling surface S10 can also be performed by, for example, fixing a magnet to the coupling surface S10 and using the magnetic force of the magnet. However, in this case, when operating the swing base member 10421 from the contact state to the separated state, it is necessary to generate a load for removing the attraction by the magnet, and thus the load at the time of starting the drive device 460 increases. . Therefore, the load required to start the main body member 10410 in the upward direction from the extended position increases, and the driving force required for the drive device 460 increases, resulting in an increase in product cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the load applied to one member of the shielding member 10420 is composed only of its own weight and the force (tensile force or the like) generated by the rigidity of the members in the relationship between the connecting member 423 and the main body member 10410. To be done. Therefore, the force required to move the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 from the contact state where the coupling surface S10 abuts to the separated state is different from the case where magnetic force is applied, and the weight of each member or Only the force that opposes the force generated by the rigidity. As a result, the driving force required for the drive device 460 at the time of starting the main body member 10410 can be reduced.

  The arrangement route of the electric wiring to the shielding member 10420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. 69 and 70 are rear views of the combined operation unit 10400. Note that FIG. 69 illustrates a state where the main body member 10410 is arranged at the intermediate position, and FIG. 70 illustrates a state where the main body member 10410 is arranged at the projecting position. 69 and 70, the drive device 460, the rear upper plate 470, and the wiring guide arm 480 are not shown for easy understanding.

  The relative positional relationship between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 of the shielding member 10420 when the main body member 10410 is in the retracted position is similar to that in the state where the main body member 10410 is in the intermediate position. , Which is also used in the description of FIG. 69.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the main body member 10410 is different from the main body member 410 in the first embodiment in that the main body member 10410 has an insertion hole 10411a for inserting the wiring W10 into the base member 10411. .

  By being inserted into the insertion hole 10411a, when the wiring W10 passes from the rear side to the front side of the main body member 10410, the wiring W10 can pass inside the outer shape of the main body member 10410. This can prevent the wiring W10 from unintentionally interfering with the swing base member 10421 and the wiring W10 from being visually recognized by the player. Moreover, since the insertion hole 10411a itself acts as a means for bundling the wiring W10, another binding band or the like can be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the insertion hole 10411a is always formed in a position where the swing base member 10421 is arranged on the front side of the main body member 10410 while the swing base member 10421 is moving. This can prevent the wiring W10 from being visually recognized by the player in the front view. It should be noted that the insertion hole 10411a is symmetrical with respect to the rear view left side insertion hole 10411a with respect to the center position of the main body member 10410 in the left-right direction even on the rear view right side which is a portion hidden by the printed circuit board B10 in FIG. 69 and not visible. It is arranged in the shape of.

  Here, when arranging the electric wiring on the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422, in order to reduce the area where the electric wiring is visually recognized by the player, in the operation of the main body member 10410, the rear case 210 (FIG. 6). The electric wiring was run through the part where the movement distance from (see) was short. In this embodiment, that portion is considered to correspond to the connecting member 423 that operates only when the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position. This is because the main body member 10410 does not operate while moving from the intermediate position to the extended position.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the connecting member 423 is configured as a supporting member that does not serve as a decoration member, it is made of a colorless and transparent material, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize and makes the player aware. Where it is desirable to distract the electric wiring, if the electric wiring is laid along the connecting member 423, the electric wiring cannot be made colorless and transparent, so that the electric wiring attracts the player's consciousness and there is a possibility that the production may be hindered. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring W that transmits a signal to the swinging member 430 is provided on the wiring guide arm 480 (see FIG. 33) connected to the main body member 10410. The wiring W is connected to a printed circuit board B10 arranged on the main body member 10410, and an electric wiring is extended from the printed circuit board B10 to the swinging member 430. Similarly, the wiring W10 is extended from the vicinity of the printed board B10, is fixed to the back surface side of the main body member 10410 to hold the wiring inside the frame, and passes through the holding member H10 extended to the vicinity of the insertion hole 10411a. Through the insertion hole 10411a.

  The holding member H10 has a wall surface (a wall surface that abuts the back side surface of the main body member 10410) that restricts passage of the wiring W10 between the main body member 10410 and the opposite side of the main body member 10410 (the front side in FIG. 69). ) Is partially opened, and in the partially opened portion, there is provided a claw portion extending from the end face on the front side so as to cover the wiring W10.

  Since the holding member H10 is provided with these configurations, it is possible to prevent the wiring W10 from interfering with the insertion shaft portion 10421c that moves in the guide hole 10413, and also to assemble the wiring W10 from the back side (the wiring W10 is a claw portion). It is easy to insert it into the inside of the holding member H10 while hooking it).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a connecting portion between the main body member 10410 and the leg member 10440 will be described. 71 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 10400 taken along the line LXXI-LXXI in FIG. 66.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the leg member 10440 includes an inclined surface 10447 on the base side of the connection fixing portion 442 that is a connection portion with the main body member 10410. The inclined surface 10447 is formed such that the side surface on the front side projects to the front side (left side in FIG. 71) as the position lowers, and is inclined at an inclination angle β1 in a side view. Since the side surface on the back side of the main body member 10410 is fixed to the side surface, the main body member 10410 itself also has a posture in which the lower side portion projects toward the front side.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the holding portion 415 (see FIG. 23) from coming off the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) when the main body member 10410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 66).

  That is, in the combined operation unit 10400, the main body member 10410 is composed of a long member extending in the left-right direction, and both ends in the left-right direction are supported, so that the composite operation unit 10400 is easily bent in the up-down direction and the front-back direction (resistance to deformation is low. ) It is a mode. In the first embodiment and this embodiment, since the swinging member 430 (see FIG. 21) is arranged on the front side of the main body members 410, 10410, the center of gravity is closer to the front side, and the main body members 410, 10410 move forward. It was easy to deform in a fallen manner.

  Therefore, when the main body member 410 is assembled in parallel with the leg member 440 as in the first embodiment, the main body member 410 is deformed in a forward tilted manner, so that the main body member 410 is most easily deformed. The holding portion 415 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the upper end of the can be easily disengaged from the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) (the arrangement can be shifted in the front-back direction). Therefore, there is a problem that the main body member 410 may drop at an unexpected timing.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the inclined surface 10447 is formed on the root side of the connecting and fixing portion 442 that is the connecting portion between the main body member 10410 and the leg member 10440, so that the main body member 10410 is pre-rotated in the backward rotation direction. It is assembled in a rotated posture.

  With this, it is possible to cancel the posture change caused by the deformation of the main body member 10410 tilting forward, and it is possible to make it difficult for the holding portion (see FIG. 23) to come off from the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21). The size of the tilt angle β1 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the size of the tilt angle β1 is 5 degrees.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, contact and separation between the main body member 10410 and the shielding member 10420 during the vertical movement of the main body member 10410 will be described. 72 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 66, FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 10400 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 10400 taken along the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68. 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding, the swinging member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the cross section of the decorative member 422 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the main body member 10410 is below the pair of guide holes 10413 and extends along a straight line parallel to the extending direction of the guide holes 10413 (the direction of the letter C in front view, see FIG. 66). The support plate 10413b is provided so as to extend in the thickness direction of the main body member 10410 and project in a plate shape in the thickness direction.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72, the support plate 10413b is extended to a position below the insertion shaft portion 10421c and in contact with the back side surface of the shielding member 10420. In addition, the extension height of the support plate 10413b is configured so as to decrease as it approaches the center of the main body member 10410 in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the main body member 10410 is arranged in the retracted position as shown in FIG. 72 (see FIG. 66), the connecting member 423 is pushed upward, and a load is generated to lift the swing base member 10421 upward from the connecting member. Since the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are not located at the center of gravity G10 toward the front side (left side in FIG. 72), the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 rotate forward around the connecting portion between the insertion shaft portion 10421c and the main body member 10410. 72 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 72, corresponding to the second direction) is tilted forward at the first twist angle α1.

  Therefore, the portion of the swing base member 10421 below the insertion shaft portion 10421c that is the connection position with the main body member 10410 approaches the main body member 10410 side, and in this state, the back side surface of the decorative member 422 and the support plate. The front end portion of the 10413b comes into contact with each other to generate resistance (friction resistance).

  By this resistance, when the main body member 10410 moves, it is possible to prevent relative movement of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 and the main body member 10410. That is, the main body member 10410 descends from the state in which it is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 66) toward the state in which it is arranged in the intermediate position (see FIG. 67) (this direction and the opposite direction correspond to the first direction). Even if the speed at the time of starting is high, it is possible to prevent only the main body member 10410 from descending, and the situation in which the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 are left behind.

  As described above, since the main body member 10410 on which the support plate 10413b is disposed projects toward the front side toward the lower side, the contact position between the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b is set. It can be in a high position. As a result, as compared with the case where the surface of the main body member 10410 on which the support plate 10413b is arranged is made uniform (a mode in which it does not project), the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b tilt forward due to gravity. Since it is possible to increase the load generated between the positions, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the gravity center position G10 for generating the necessary resistance.

  The resistance between the support plate 10413b and the swing base member 10421 can be generated by magnetic force. In this case, however, when the magnets are separated, the resistance between the support plate 10413b and the swing base member 10421 is increased. The generated reverse load (reaction) increases and the members vibrate, which may hinder the performance. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since such a reaction does not occur, it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73, in the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the intermediate position (see FIG. 67), the connecting member 423 is arranged at the lower end of the vertical movement, and the swing base member 10421 and the decoration are arranged. The member 422 begins to receive the upward load F10, which is the direction opposite to gravity, from the connecting member 423.

  By this load F10, the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 rotate in the backward direction (corresponding to the second direction in the clockwise direction in FIG. 73) about the connecting portion between the insertion shaft portion 10421c and the main body member 10410 as an axis. Then, the body member 10410 is tilted forward at the second twist angle α2. Here, the second twist angle α2 is made slightly smaller (1 degree in the present embodiment) than the first twist angle α1.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the upright posture (posture tilted at the second twist angle α2), the back side surface of the decorative member 422 and the tip portion of the support plate 10413b are separated from each other. Accordingly, the resistance between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 can be reduced, and the main body member 10410 is extended from the intermediate position (see FIGS. 67 and 73) to the extended position (see FIGS. 68 and 73). (See 74)), it is possible to reduce the operation resistance when the slide operation is performed.

  When the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 move relative to each other, so that the operation resistance is reduced, and the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 are Can be smoothly performed, and the driving force of the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66) can be suppressed.

  Further, when the main body member 10410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the distance between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 does not change, but the distance between the swing base member 10421 and the support plate 10413b changes. To do. As a result, as compared with the case where the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction during the movement of the main body member 10410, the change in the operating resistance between the swing base member 10421 and the main body member 10410 is changed. It can make it harder for the player to understand what is happening.

  Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operational resistance between the swing base member 10421 and the main body member 10410 while minimizing the discomfort of the effect (while maintaining the sense of unity between the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421). it can.

  The change in posture between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73 is a posture change in a direction in which the length in the lateral direction of the decorative member 422 formed of a long shape in the left-right direction is changed. Therefore, even if the angle of the posture change becomes large, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the difference in the length of the decorative member 422, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player.

  Further, the change between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73 is the change in posture along the extending direction (supporting direction) of the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 supported by the main body member 10410. Is. The insertion shaft portion 10421c is extended from the back side to the front side when viewed from the player. Since the change in this direction is the change in the perspective direction, the positional relationship of each member does not change, and a partial enlargement / reduction occurs. Therefore, for example, as compared with a change along the extending direction of the surface of the game board 13 (a change that causes a change in the positional relationship of each member), it is difficult for the player to understand that the change has occurred. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort in the production that the player feels.

  In the posture change between the state shown in FIG. 72 and the state shown in FIG. 73, the driving force acting is only the driving force by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66). That is, a separate drive device for changing the postures of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 with respect to the main body member 10410 can be eliminated. As a result, the overall configuration of the combined operation unit 10400 can be reduced in weight.

  With the state shown in FIG. 73 (see FIG. 67) as a boundary, whether or not an upward load is generated on the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 via the connecting member 423 is switched. That is, whether or not the postures of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 are switched can be switched based on the arrangement of the main body member 10410. Therefore, the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 are irrespective of the operating speed of the main body member 10410. Can change the posture of.

  Therefore, regardless of whether the drive motor 433 is driven at high speed or at low speed, the main body member 10410, the swing base member 10421, and the decorative member 422 are separated by the state in which the main body member 10410 is arranged at the intermediate position. The operating resistance between can be changed.

  Further, when the main body member 10410 is started in the upward direction from the state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIGS. 68 and 74), the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 with respect to the main body member 10410 are also separated. Since the resistance can be reduced, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the swing base member 10421 does not move relative to the main body member 10410 and the weight of the shielding member 10420 is directly applied to the main body member 10410. Accordingly, the driving force required for the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 66) when the main body member 10410 is started upward from the extended position can be reduced, and the drive motor 433 can be downsized.

  Next, the bidirectional operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the two-way operation unit 700, and FIG. 76 is an exploded rear perspective view of the two-way operation unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the two-way operation unit 700 includes a main body member 710 forming a skeleton, a disc member 720 rotatably supported by a shaft support hole 711 of the main body member 710, and a circle thereof. A thick gear 730 into which the rotary shaft 722 of the plate member 720 is inserted and fixed, a drive device 740 that generates a driving force for rotating the thick gear 730, and a vertical sliding operation in conjunction with the rotation of the disc member 720. It mainly includes an operating member 750 that operates, a supporting member 760 that supports the operating member 750 so that the operating member 750 can slide up and down, and a cover member 770 that shields the supporting member 760 invisible.

  The main body member 710 has a shaft support hole 711 bored in the front-rear direction in the central portion, a tubular portion 712 tubularly extended rearward from the edge of the shaft support hole 711, and a gear portion respectively. It mainly includes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) shaft support rods 713 and a support groove portion 714 that supports the drive motor 741.

  The cylindrical portion 712 supports the thick gear 730. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 712 slides with the outer peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 731 of the thick gear 730, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 712 further inner peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 732 of the thick gear 730. It is supported in a manner to slide on the surface.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the thick-walled gear 730 is not positioned by the rotation shaft 722 of the disc member 720, but the thick-walled gear 730 is positioned on the tubular portion 712, and the thick-walled gear 730 is circled by the thick-walled gear 730. The plate member 720 is configured so that the rotation shaft thereof is supported. Accordingly, even if a vertical load is applied to the disc member 720, it is possible to prevent the thick gear 730 from being displaced in the direction perpendicular to the axis based on the load.

  The disc member 720 includes a disc portion 721 formed of a light-transmissive material in a disc shape, a rotary shaft 722 extending in the thickness direction from the center portion of the disc portion 721, and a disc portion. 721 mainly includes a pair of transmission protrusions 723 protruding from the opposite side of the rotation shaft 722.

  The rotating shaft 722 is a rod-shaped member rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole 711 of the main body member 710. A plurality of LEDs are arranged on the front side of the main body member 710 in a region where the rotary shaft 722 is supported by the main body member 710 and shielded by the disc portion 721.

  The pair of transmission protrusions 723 are arranged in such a manner that the center of a straight line connecting the transmission protrusions 723 coincides with the rotation shaft 722.

  The thick-gear gear 730 is mainly formed of a bottomed tubular shape with a hollow inside, and mainly includes an inner tubular portion 731 formed at the center of the bottom portion and an outer tubular portion 732 having a gear formed on the outer peripheral surface. .

  Here, the inner cylinder portion 731 has a lower extension height from the bottom portion, while the outer cylinder portion 732 has a higher extension height from the bottom portion and abuts the rear side surface of the main body member 710 in the assembled state. It is arranged as possible. That is, since the arrangement of the inner cylinder portion 731 is located away from the main body member 710, the thickness of the support portion of the thick gear 730 becomes long. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft 722 with respect to the thick gear 730 while suppressing the attitude of the thick gear 730 with respect to the main body member 710.

  The drive device 740 includes a drive motor 741 disposed on the front side of the main body member 710 in such a manner that the rotary shaft projects from the support groove 714 to the rear side, and a drive gear 742 fixed to the drive motor 741. And a transmission gear 743 that is a plurality of gear groups that transmits a driving force from the drive gear 742 to the thick-walled gear 730 and that is axially supported by the shaft support rod 713.

  The operating member 750 includes a plate-shaped main member 751 disposed on the back side of the support member 760, a plate-shaped auxiliary member 752 that sandwiches the support member 760 from the front side in relation to the main member 751, and a main member. An abutting member 753 fixed to the rear surface of the main body 751 and abutting against the transmission convex portion 723, and a pair of rotatably rotatably supported on the front side of the main member 751 with the engaging plate portion 764 interposed therebetween. The rotary member 754 is mainly provided.

  The main member 751 is housed in the first elongated hole 761 of the support member 760, and is projected with a width slightly smaller than the width of the first elongated hole 761. The pair of second protrusions that are housed in the portion 751a and the pair of second elongated holes 762 of the support member 760, are convexly formed with a width slightly smaller than the second elongated hole 762, and the auxiliary member 752 is fastened and fixed to the tip. A pair of shaft support holes formed in a circular shape at positions symmetrical to each other with the installation portion 751b and the first projecting portion 751a sandwiched between the installation plate 751b and the engagement plate portion 764 of the support member 760. 751c and mainly.

  Due to the shape relationship between the first elongated portion 751a and the second elongated portion 751b and the first elongated hole 761 and the second elongated hole 762 of the support member 760, the operation member 750 has the first elongated hole 761 and the second elongated hole 762. It is possible to prevent the posture of the operating member 750 from tilting when operating in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the 762.

  The contact member 753 is arranged above the transmission convex portion 723 of the disc member 720, and interferes with the rotation locus of the transmission convex portion 723 in a state in which the operation member 750 is arranged at the lowermost end, and the transmission convex portion 723. The lower side surface that abuts 723 is formed in a curved shape having a larger radius of curvature than the outer circumference circle of the rotation locus of the transmission protrusion 723.

  Therefore, as the disc member 720 rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the contact member 753 via the transmission convex portion 723, and the operation member 750 moves up and down. Details of the vertical movement will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.

  The rotating member 754 includes a main body portion 754a that produces an effect by a rotating operation, a rotating shaft 754b that is provided in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the main body portion 754a toward the back side, and is rotatably supported by a shaft supporting hole 751c. An engaging protrusion 754c that is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the rotating shaft 754b is mainly provided.

  The engagement protrusion 754c is disposed between the engagement plate portions 764 of the support member 760. As a result, regardless of whether the operating member 750 operates upward or downward, the engaging protrusion 754c is pushed by the engaging plate portion 764, and the rotating member 754 rotates (see FIGS. 77 and 78). ).

  The support member 760 includes a first elongated hole 761 for accommodating the coil spring CS10 whose upper end is connected to the operating member 750, and a pair of second elongated holes disposed on the left and right of the first elongated hole 761. The hole 762, the hook-shaped connecting portion 763 to which the lower end of the coil spring CS10 is connected, and the pair of plate-like protrusions that are vertically spaced above the first elongated hole 761 and are formed on the front side. And an engaging plate portion 764 of.

  The operation of the two-way operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b) are front views of the two-way operation unit 700. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operation of the operation member 750 based on the rotation operation of the disc member 720 is illustrated in a time series, for understanding. For ease of illustration, the illustration of the cover member 770 is omitted, and the inner sides of the transmission convex portion 723 of the disc member 720 and the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 are filled.

  With the configuration described above, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 741 is transmitted to the thick-walled gear 730 via the transmission gear 743 (see FIG. 75), and the disc member 720 fixed to the thick-walled gear 730 is moved. Rotate. 77 (a), 77 (b), 78 (a) and 78 (b), the change of the state of the two-way operation unit 700 based on the rotation of the drive motor 741 is illustrated.

  That is, FIG. 77A shows a state in which the disc member 720 is in a posture in which the pair of transmission convex portions 723 are aligned in the left and right, and in FIG. 77B, it is shown in FIG. 77A. From the state, the state where the disc member 720 is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees in the front view is illustrated.

  FIG. 78 (a) illustrates a state in which the disc member 720 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view (a state in which the pair of transmission protrusions 723 are vertically aligned) from the state shown in FIG. 77 (b). 78 (b), a state in which the disc member 720 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) is shown.

  From FIG. 78 (b), when the disk member 720 is further rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees in a front view, the disk member 720 is only half rotated from the state shown in FIG. 77 (a). The state of the operation unit 700 returns to the state shown in FIG. 77 (a).

  That is, when the disc member 720 rotates half a turn, the operating member 750 makes a vertical reciprocating motion. Therefore, for example, the reciprocating cycle of the vertical movement of the operating member 750 is shortened (halved in comparison with the case where a single protrusion moves based on the rotation of the disc member 720 and the operating member 750 is vertically moved. )be able to. This makes it possible to suppress the rotation speed of the drive motor 741 even when it is desired to operate the operating member 750 at high speed. Therefore, when the operating speed of the operating member 750 is high, the operating speed required for the drive motor 741 can be suppressed, so that the performance required for the drive motor 741 can be reduced, and the drive motor 741 can be downsized. Can be planned. Further, based on the shortening of the operation cycle of the operation member 750, the cycle of the swinging operation of the rotating member 754 can also be shortened.

  When the drive motor 741 continues to rotate, the disk member 720 continues to rotate, the state changes from FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 78 (b), and the state change of returning to FIG. 77 (a) loops. . Therefore, the contact position between the transmission convex portion 723 of the disk member 720 and the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 can be always arranged vertically above the rotation shaft 722 of the disk member 720.

  When a single protrusion moves based on the rotation of the disc member 720, for example, a long hole extending in the left-right direction is provided in the operating member 750, and the single protrusion is inside the long hole. When sliding, the motion of the motion member 750 is always interlocked with the rotary motion of the disc member 720, so the number of motion types is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 is only supported by the transmission convex portion 723 from the lower side, so that the rotation speed of the disc member 720 is slow and fast. The operation mode of the operation member 750 can be changed.

  That is, the downward movement of the operation member 750 is due to gravity and the elastic force generated from the coil spring CS10, and the transmission convex portion 723 contacts the contact member 753 before the operation member 750 descends due to these forces. When the disk member 720 is rotated at the contacting rotation speed, the operation member 750 is kept in the upper part of the movement range (a state in which the state shown in FIG. 77 (b) and FIG. 78 (a) is repeated, or The operating member can be operated in such a manner as to be maintained in the state shown in FIG. 78 (a). Accordingly, the operation mode (operation range) of the operation member 750 can be changed depending on whether the rotation speed of the drive motor 741 is slow or fast.

  77 and 78, the case where the disc member 720 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front has been described. However, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, Similarly, when the disc member 720 is rotated in the opposite direction and continuously rotated, the operating member 750 can be vertically moved.

  Here, if the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is reversed, the range of contact of the transmission projection 723 with the contact member 753 at the start of contact can be changed. That is, when the disc member 720 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, one portion abuts the abutment member 753 with a straight line passing through the transmission projection 723 and the rotation shaft 722 being sandwiched (see FIG. 77 (b)). On the other hand, when the disc member 720 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the other portion abuts the abutting member with the straight line passing through the transmission convex portion 723 and the rotating shaft 722 being sandwiched (see FIG. 78 (b)).

  Therefore, by reversing the rotation direction of the disc member 720 every predetermined period, it is possible to reduce the degree of wear of the transmission protrusion 723 caused by the contact between the transmission protrusion 723 and the contact member 753 (wear). It is possible to disperse the portions to be dispersed), and it is possible to extend the life of the transmission convex portion 723.

  The mode of vertical displacement of the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 is the same regardless of the rotation direction of the disc member 720, but as shown in FIG. Since they are displaced to the left and right (in the present embodiment, they are closer to the left side in the front view from the shape of the main member 751), the transmission convex portion 723 contacts the contact member 753 depending on the rotation direction of the disc member 720. The inclination of the operating member 750 and the contact member 753 when the contact is started (at the start of contact) is different.

  That is, when the disc member 720 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the transmission convex portion 723 abuts on the lower right portion of the abutting member 753, and the center of gravity position of the operating member 750 is reached. Due to the relationship (the abutting position is on the right side of the center of gravity position), the operating member 750 is slightly inclined in a manner rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the disc member 720 rotates clockwise in a front view, the transmission convex portion 723 contacts the lower left portion of the contact member 753 as shown in FIG. The transmission convex portion 723 pushes up the position from below, and the operating member moves upward without changing its posture.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the rotating direction of the disc member 720 by confirming by staring whether or not the operating member 750 is slightly inclined when the operating member 750 is started to rise. In this way, the rotation direction of the disk member 720 can be grasped casually, and the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is changed depending on whether the jackpot expectation is small or large. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of confirming the rotation direction of the disc member 720 only to the player who is playing the game, and to configure so that only the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the pair of transmission protrusions 723 are arranged at the left and right and at the same position in the vertical direction, the operating member 750 is arranged at the lowermost end, but in this state, from the contact member 753. The transmission convex portion 723 is arranged so as to be spaced downward. Therefore, even if the frame vibrates for some reason and the operating member 750 vibrates up and down, it is possible to prevent the contact member 753 and the transmission convex portion 723 from colliding due to the vibration. It is possible to prevent the portion 723 and the contact member 753 from being damaged.

  The curved shape of the contact member 753 of the operation member 750 will be described. 79 is a front view of the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 of the disc member 720, and FIG. 80 (a) shows a vertical direction of the operating member 750 when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. 80B is a graph showing displacement, and FIG. 80B is a graph showing moving speed of the operating member 750 in the vertical direction when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed.

  Note that, in FIG. 79, the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 753 of the disc member 720 are shown as a model diagram. Further, for comparison, the outer shape of the lower side surface that abuts when the lower side surface of the contact member 753 is a flat surface and the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged at the initial position P10s is illustrated by an imaginary line. 80 (a) and 80 (b) show changes when the disc member 720 makes one rotation.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the transmission convex portion 723 of the disc member 720 is formed such that the outer circumference of the rotation locus is formed with a radius R10, and the curved portions 753a which are the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 753 are larger than the radius R10. It is formed from a curved shape having a large radius of curvature. The connecting portion between the pair of left and right curved portions 753a has a planar shape.

  In the present embodiment, since the curved portion 753a is formed in a curved shape instead of a linear shape, it is possible to suppress a change in the operation speed of the operation member 750. This will be described below.

  In FIG. 79, a locus when the transmission convex portion 723 rotates by a predetermined angle is illustrated. That is, from the initial position P10s, which is the position horizontally moved to the right from the rotation shaft 722, through the first position P10h, which is the position rotated counterclockwise by the angle θ10a (θ10a <45 degrees), to the first position P10s. The locus | trajectory at the time of reaching the 2nd position P10e which is the position which rotated counterclockwise from angle P10a from position P10h is illustrated.

  In FIG. 80A, the horizontal axis represents elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents the arrangement of members in the vertical direction. The vertical displacement Yr of the transmission projection 723 contacting the operating member 750 and the lower surface of the contact member 753. The relationship between the vertical displacement Ya of the operating member 750 and the vertical displacement Yb of the operating member 750 in the present embodiment is illustrated. The curves of the displacement Ya and the displacement Yr are formed by a shape in which sin waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees are connected.

  In FIG. 80 (b), the horizontal axis represents elapsed time and the vertical axis represents the vertical speed of the member, and the vertical speed Vr of the transmission protrusion 723 contacting the operating member 750 and the lower surface of the contact member 753. The relationship between the vertical velocity Va of the operating member 750 and the vertical velocity Vb of the operating member 750 in the present embodiment is illustrated. The curves of the velocity Va and the velocity Vr are formed by connecting the cos waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 (a), when the transmission protrusion 723 rotates at a constant speed, the angle between the initial position P10s and the first position P10h, and the first position P10h and the second position P10h. The angle with respect to P10e is the same as the angle θ10a, but since the transmission protrusion 723 operates on a rotational orbit, the vertical movement distance during the movement of the transmission protrusion 723 from the initial position P10s to the first position P10h. The dL10a and the vertical movement distance dL10b during the movement of the transmission convex portion 723 from the first position P10h to the second position P10e are different. In other words, the moving distance dL10b on the way of rising becomes shorter than the moving distance dL10a at the start of rising of the operating member 750 within the same time.

  Therefore, for example, when the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction, even if the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 80 (b). The operating speed of the vertical movement of the contact member 753 varies depending on the phase of the transmission convex portion 723. Therefore, when it is desired to suppress the fluctuation of the moving speed of the contact member 753 up and down, it is necessary to complicatedly change the rotation speed of the disk member 720, and the control becomes complicated. Further, when the control is performed in a complicated manner, the disk member 720 does not rotate at a constant speed, and therefore the disk member 720 and the operating member 750 cannot both be operated at the same speed.

  In the present embodiment, the operating member 750 is arranged in a position that is always visible to the player, rather than in a mode in which the operating member 750 moves in an extended state that is visible to the player and a retracted state that is not visible to the player. It is considered that a demand for operating the plate member 720 and the operating member 750 at the same speed is likely to occur.

  In response to this request, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a curved shape. To be more specific, when the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed of a flat surface, a concave along the vertical direction from the flat surface to the position where the transmission convex portion 723 abuts when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged at the first position P10h. The installation distance is the recessed installation distance dL10c, and from the position where the transmission protrusion 723 abuts when the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged at the first position P10h to the position where the transmission protrusion 723 abuts when the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged at the second position P10e. The curved portion 753a is formed such that the recessed distance along the top and bottom is the recessed distance dL10d.

  The curved shape of the curved portion 753a is formed in such a manner that the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL10c from the movement distance dL10a is longer than the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL10d from the movement distance dL10b (dL10a-dL10c). > DL10b-dL10d).

  As a result, fluctuations in the vertical movement speed of the operating member 750 based on the rotational movement of the transmission convex portion 723 can be absorbed by the curved shape of the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753, and the circular plate In a situation where the member 720 rotates at a constant speed, it is possible to suppress the speed fluctuation of the vertical movement of the operation member 750. Therefore, the effect of operating the rotating disc member 720 and the sliding operation member 750 at the same operation speed can be performed by simply rotating the single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75) at a constant speed. it can.

  Here, it is possible to rotate the disk member 720 at a constant speed while operating the sliding operation member 750 at a constant speed by converting the rotational motion of the gear into a linear motion by the rack. In that case, An extra space for arranging the rack is required, and it becomes necessary to reverse the operation direction of the drive motor 741 when reciprocating in the linear direction. When the drive motor 741 is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is also reversed, and the disk member 720 cannot maintain the constant-speed rotation operation. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the operating member 750 can be linearly reciprocated by rotating the disc member 720 in one direction at a constant speed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the transmission convex portions 723 are formed in a pair, and the transmission convex portions 723 that come into contact with the contact member 753 are replaced every half rotation of the disc member 720, so that the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753 is replaced. The disk member 720 and the operating member 750 can be operated at the same operating speed by a simple method of forming a curved shape. This will be described below.

  For example, when the transmission protrusion 723 is composed of a single protrusion, the contact state between the contact member 753 formed in a curved shape and the transmission protrusion 723 is such that the transmission protrusion 723 is in the first quadrant (Fig. The upper right region of the four regions divided by the vertical line and the horizontal line passing through the rotation axis 722 in 79. The first quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, and the fourth quadrant are rotated counterclockwise every 90 degrees. It is arranged in the second quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, or the fourth quadrant.

  In the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 753 is formed in a curved shape that is convex upward, and is configured to absorb the difference in operating speed of the transmission convex portion 723. In this case, it is good when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the first quadrant or the second quadrant, but a problem occurs when it is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant.

  That is, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant, when the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753 is formed in the upward convex curved shape as in the present embodiment, the curved shape may be changed depending on the curved shape. , When the transmission convex portion 723 starts to rotate from the left end (see FIG. 79), the descending speed of the contact member 753 further increases, which promotes the speed change of the operating member 750 and the speed of the operating member 750. Unable to control change.

  Further, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the fourth quadrant, when the curved portion 753a of the contact member 753 is formed in the upward convex curved shape as in the present embodiment, depending on the curved shape. As the transmission convex portion 723 moves to the right from the lower end (see FIG. 79), the ascending speed of the contact member 753 further increases, which promotes the speed change of the operating member 750, and the speed of the operating member 750. Unable to control change.

  Therefore, in order to continue suppressing the fluctuation of the operating speed of the operating member 750 while rotating the disc member 720 at a constant speed, the transmitting convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant in order to continue to be suppressed. It is necessary to avoid contact between the contact member 723 and the contact member 753.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the transmission convex portions 723 at 180-degree intervals, when one transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant, the first quadrant or the fourth quadrant is arranged. Since the other transmission protrusion 723 arranged in the second quadrant abuts on the contact member 753, the transmission protrusion 723 arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant and the contact member 753 contact each other. It is possible to avoid contact.

  81 to 85, the combined operation unit 11400 and the bidirectional operation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, the case in which the swing base member 10421 is supported by the guide hole 10413 formed in parallel with the extending direction of the main body member 10410 is described. However, the combined operation in the eleventh embodiment is described. The unit 11400 is formed such that the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 11413 that supports the swing base member 10421 is inclined in the thickness direction with respect to the extending direction of the main body member 10410.

  The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 81 to 83, the swinging member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 are omitted.

  81 is a cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 11400 in the eleventh embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 66, and FIG. 82 is a combined operation unit in the line corresponding to the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 67. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of 11400, and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of combined operation unit 11400 taken along the line corresponding to line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 68.

  81 shows a state in which the main body member 11410 is arranged in the retracted position, FIG. 82 shows a state in which the main body member 11410 is arranged in an intermediate position, and FIG. 83 shows the main body member 11410 in an extended state. The state of being placed in position is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the main body member 11410 includes a guide hole 11413 that supports the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421. The guide hole 11413 is formed at an inclination angle similar to that of the guide hole 10413 of the tenth embodiment in a front view, and extends in a direction in which the guide hole 11413 extends upward and extends toward the front side (left side in FIG. 81). To be done.

  More specifically, in the cross section shown in FIG. 82, as compared with the overhang width W11a from the side surface on the rear surface side of the base member 10411 to the rear surface side end portion of the guide hole 11413 (the outer end portion in the left-right direction in front view). 83, the overhanging width W11b from the side surface on the back surface side of the base member 10411 to the rear surface side end portion of the guide hole 11413 (the inner end portion in the left-right direction in front view) is made longer. The width changes continuously as the position shifts in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. That is, the guide hole 11413 is inclined toward the front side as it extends upward and inward in a front view.

  On the other hand, the support plate 10413b arranged below the guide hole 11413 is configured such that the extension height becomes lower as it approaches the center of the main body member 11410 in the left-right direction, as in the tenth embodiment.

  Therefore, the distance from the tip portion of the guide hole 11413 (the left end portion in FIG. 81) to the tip portion of the support plate 10413b is shorter in the upper end position than in the lower end position D11a, and the lower end position is smaller than the distance D11a in the lower end position. The distance is gradually shortened from the position toward the upper end position.

  In the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the back side surface of the decorative member 422 and the front end portion of the support plate 10413b contact each other. This can increase the operational resistance of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 with respect to the main body member 11410, and thus suppress the relative movement of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 with respect to the main body member 11410. be able to.

  On the other hand, as the insertion shaft portion 10421c slides upward in the guide hole 11413 from the state shown in FIG. 82, the swing base member 10421 separates from the main body member 11410 to the front side along the inclination of the guide hole 11413. Since it moves in this manner, the front end portion of the support plate 10413b and the back side surface of the decorative member 422 are separated (see FIG. 83).

  Accordingly, in the operation of moving the swing base member 10421 relative to the main body member 11410, such as when moving the main body member 11410 from the intermediate position to the extended position, the operation resistance of the relative movement is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the operation of the combined operation unit 11400 can be smoothed.

  Further, since the support plate 10413b and the decorative member 422 do not contact each other when the main body member 11410 is in the projecting state (see FIGS. 68 and 83), the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member when the main body member 11410 is started upward. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the weight of the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 is applied to the main body member 11410 by the main body member 11410 without the relative movement of the main body member 11410. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 65) required when the main body member 11410 is started to move up can be suppressed.

  The change between the state shown in FIG. 82 and the state shown in FIG. 83 is a change in posture along the extending direction (support direction) of the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 supported by the main body member 11410. . The insertion shaft portion 10421c is extended from the back side to the front side when viewed from the player. Since the change in this direction is a change in the perspective direction, the positional relationship of each member does not change, and a partial enlargement / reduction occurs. Therefore, for example, as compared with a change along the extending direction of the surface of the game board 13 (a change that causes a change in the positional relationship of each member), it is difficult for the player to understand that the change has occurred. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort in the production that the player feels.

  Next, the bidirectional operation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. In the bidirectional operation unit 11700, the shape of the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed so that when the disk member 720 rotates at a constant speed, the operation member 11750 moves vertically at a constant speed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The curved shape of the contact member 11753 of the operation member 11750 will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the disc member 720 and the contact member 11753, and FIG. 85 (a) is a graph showing the vertical displacement of the operating member 11750 when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. FIG. 85 (b) is a graph showing the vertical movement speed of the operating member 11750 when the disc member 720 is rotated at a constant speed. In addition, in FIG. 84, the disk member 720 and the contact member 11753 are shown in a model view. Further, for comparison, the outer shape of the lower side surface that abuts when the lower side surface of the contact member 753 is a flat surface and the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged at the initial position P10s is illustrated by an imaginary line. 85 (a) and 85 (b) show changes when the disc member 720 makes one rotation.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the transmission projection 723 of the disc member 720 is formed such that the outer circumference of the rotation locus is formed with a radius R10, and the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed into a curved shape having a larger radius of curvature than the radius R10. It

  In the present embodiment, the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed in a curved shape instead of a linear shape, so that the operation speed of the operation member 11750 can be suppressed from changing from position to position. This will be described below.

  In FIG. 84, a locus when the transmission convex portion 723 rotates by a predetermined angle is illustrated. That is, from the initial position P10s, which is the position horizontally moved to the right from the rotation shaft 722, through the first position P10h, which is the position that is rotated counterclockwise by the angle θ10a, from the first position P10h, the angle θ10a. A locus when reaching the second position P10e which is a position rotated counterclockwise is illustrated.

  In FIG. 85 (a), the horizontal axis represents elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents the arrangement of members in the vertical direction. The displacement Yr in the vertical direction of the transmission projection 723 contacting the operating member 11750 and the lower surface of the contact member 11753. The relationship between the vertical displacement Ya of the operating member 11750 and the vertical displacement Y11b of the operating member 11750 in the present embodiment is shown. The curves of the displacement Ya and the displacement Yr are formed by a shape in which sin waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees are connected.

  In FIG. 85 (b), the horizontal axis represents elapsed time and the vertical axis represents the vertical speed of the member, and the vertical speed Vr of the transmission convex portion 723 contacting the operating member 11750 and the lower surface of the contact member 11753. The relationship between the vertical speed Va of the operating member 11750 and the vertical speed V11b of the operating member 11750 in the present embodiment is illustrated in the case where is formed from a plane. The curves of the velocity Va and the velocity Vr are formed by connecting the cos waves from 0 degree to 180 degrees.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 (a), when the transmission protrusion 723 rotates at a constant speed, the angle between the initial position P10s and the first position P10h, and the first position P10h and the second position P10h. The angle with respect to P10e is the same as the angle θ10a, but since the transmission protrusion 723 operates on a rotational orbit, the vertical movement distance during the movement of the transmission protrusion 723 from the initial position P10s to the first position P10h. The dL10a and the vertical movement distance dL10b during the movement of the transmission convex portion 723 from the first position P10h to the second position P10e are different. In other words, the moving distance dL10b on the way up is shorter than the moving distance dL10a at the start of rising of the operating member 11750 within the same time.

  Therefore, for example, when the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction, even if the disk member 720 is rotated at a constant speed, the speed Va is shown in FIG. 85 (b). As described above, the operation speed of the vertical movement of the contact member 11753 varies depending on the phase of the transmission protrusion 723. Therefore, when it is desired to move the contact member 11753 up and down at a constant speed, it is necessary to complicatedly change the rotation speed of the disk member 720, which causes a problem that control becomes complicated. Further, when the control is performed in a complicated manner, the disc member 720 is rotated based on the control, and since the disc member 720 does not rotate at a constant velocity, both the disc member 720 and the operating member 11750 are operated at a constant velocity. I can't.

  In the present embodiment, the operating member 11750 is not arranged to move in the overhang state in which the player visually recognizes it and the retracted state in which it is invisible, but is always arranged in the position visually recognized by the player. It is considered that a demand for operating the operating member 11750 at a constant speed is likely to occur while the plate member 720 is rotating at a constant speed.

  In response to this request, in the present embodiment, the curved portions 11753a that are the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 11753 absorb the change in the vertical movement speed of the transmission convex portion 723, and the vertical movement speed of the operation member 11750. Is formed from a curved shape that keeps constant.

  More specifically, when the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is formed as a flat surface, a concave along the vertical direction from the flat surface to the position where the transmission convex portion 723 abuts when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged at the first position P10h. The installation distance is the recessed installation distance dL11c, and from the position where the transmission protrusion 723 abuts when the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged in the first position P10h to the position where the transmission protrusion 723 abuts when the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged in the second position P10e. The vertical distance is the concave distance dL11d.

  In this situation, in the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 11753, the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL11c from the moving distance dL10a is equal to the length obtained by subtracting the recessed distance dL11d from the moving distance dL10b. A curved shape of a certain curved portion 11753a is formed (dL10a-dL11c = dL10b-dL11d).

  As a result, fluctuations in the vertical movement speed of the operating member 11750 based on the rotational movement of the transmission convex portion 723 can be absorbed by the curved shape of the contact member 11753, and FIG. As shown, the speed V11b of the vertical movement of the contact member 11753 can be made constant except for the folded portion of the operation member 11750, and the operation member 11750 can be moved up and down in the situation where the disk member 720 rotates at a constant speed. It is possible to operate at a constant speed. Therefore, the rotating disc member 720 and the sliding operation member 11750 can be always operated at a constant speed only by rotating the single drive motor 741 (see FIG. 75) at a constant speed.

  Here, it is possible to operate the sliding operation member 11750 at a constant speed while rotating the disk member 720 at a constant speed also by converting the rotational operation of the gear into a linear operation by the rack. In addition, an extra space for arranging the rack is required, and it becomes necessary to reverse the operation direction of the drive motor 741 when reciprocating in the linear direction. When the drive motor 741 is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation direction of the disk member 720 is also reversed, and it becomes impossible to maintain the uniform speed motion of the disk member 720.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the disk member 720 in one direction at a constant speed, the motion member 11750 can be linearly moved at a constant speed except for the folded-back portion.

  In addition, in a portion right above the rotation shaft 722, the hanging portion 11753b of the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is provided so as to project downward. This hanging portion 11753b moves the contact member 11753 even when the velocity component along the vertical direction of the transmission protrusion 723 immediately above the rotating shaft 722 approaches 0 (see velocity Vr in FIG. 85 (b)). A portion for maintaining the velocity at a constant velocity, the shape of which is created by the above equation (dL10a-dL11c = dL10b-dL11d). In the portion directly above the rotating shaft 722, the moving distance of the transmission convex portion 723 in the vertical direction becomes small. Therefore, in order to establish the above equation, a negative number is required for the portion corresponding to the concave distances dL11c and dL11d. Need to be inserted, and accordingly, the hanging portion 11753b is projected downward.

  As described above, by disposing the downwardly projecting hanging portions between the pair of left and right curved portions 11753a, the contact member 11753 is provided as compared with the case where the pair of curved portions 11753a is formed as a flat surface. It is possible to secure a long period in which the moving speed in the vertical direction is kept constant, especially at the upper end position of the moving range.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the contact member 11753 has a smaller inclination than the slope of the speed change (tangent to the curve of the speed-time graph) when the direction of the speed Vr changes from the upper side to the lower side. The slope of the speed change when the direction of the speed V11b changes from the upper side to the lower side becomes steeper. That is, compared with the case where the pair of curved portions 11753a is formed as a flat surface, the velocity V11b deviates from the constant velocity state, and the period T11 required for reversing the operation direction of the contact member 11753 is shortened.

  Therefore, the mode in which the moving direction of the operation member 11750 in which the contact member 11753 is disposed is switched at the upper end position can be easily configured from a mode in which the pinball is reflected by the wall. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize as an effect of operating the operation member 11750 at a constant speed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a pair of the transmission protrusions 723 are formed, and the transmission protrusions 723 contacting the contact member 11753 are replaced every half rotation of the disk member 720, so that the lower surface of the contact member 11753 is changed. The disk member 720 and the operating member 11750 can both be operated at a constant speed by a simple method of forming from a curved shape. This will be described below.

  For example, when the transmission protrusion 723 is composed of a single protrusion, the contact state between the contact member 11753 formed in a curved shape and the transmission protrusion 723 is such that the transmission protrusion 723 is in the first quadrant (Fig. An upper right region of the four regions partitioned by a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the rotation axis 722 at 84. The first quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, and the fourth quadrant are rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise. It is arranged in the second quadrant, the second quadrant, the third quadrant, or the fourth quadrant.

  In the present embodiment, the curved portion 11753a of the contact member 11753 is formed in a curved shape that is convex upward, so that it is configured to absorb the difference in operating speed of the transmission convex portion 723. In this case, it is good when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the first quadrant or the second quadrant, but a problem occurs when it is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant.

  That is, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant, as in the present embodiment, the curved portions 11753a, which are the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 11753, are curved upward from the convex shape. Once formed, the curved shape further accelerates the descending speed of the contact member 11753 when the transmission protrusion 723 starts to rotate from the left end (see FIG. 84), thereby facilitating the speed change of the operating member 11750. As a result, the operating member 11750 cannot be operated at a constant speed while rotating the disk member 720 at a constant speed.

  Further, for example, when the transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the fourth quadrant, as in the present embodiment, the curved portions 11753a, which are the left and right side portions of the lower surface of the contact member 11753, have a curved shape that is convex upward. When formed, the curved shape further increases the rising speed of the contact member 11753 as the transmission projection 723 moves from the lower end (see FIG. 84) to the right, thereby promoting the speed change of the operating member 11750. As a result, the operating member 11750 cannot be operated at a constant speed while rotating the disk member 720 at a constant speed.

  Therefore, in order to continue operating the operating member 11750 at a constant speed while rotating the disk member 720 at a constant speed, the transmission convex part 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant and It is necessary to avoid contact with the contact member 11753.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the transmission convex portions 723 at 180-degree intervals, when one transmission convex portion 723 is arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant, the first quadrant or the fourth quadrant is arranged. Since the other transmission convex portion 723 arranged in the second quadrant abuts on the contact member 11753, the transmission convex portion 723 and the contact member 11753 arranged in the third quadrant or the fourth quadrant contact each other. It is possible to avoid contact.

  Next, the combined operation unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the guide member 10413 of the main body member 10410 is extended along a single straight line has been described. However, the combined operation unit 12400 in the twelfth embodiment has a guide hole 12413 of the main body member 12410. However, it is extended in such a manner that the extending direction is bent halfway. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 86 to 88, the rear upper plate 470 and the wiring guide arm 480 are not shown.

  86 to 88 are front views of the combined operation unit 12400 according to the twelfth embodiment. 86 shows a state where the main body member 12410 is arranged at the intermediate position, FIG. 87 shows a state where the main body member 12410 is slightly lowered from the intermediate position, and FIG. 88 shows the main body member 12410 overhang. The state of being placed in position is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the main body member 12410 includes a guide hole 12413 that is a long hole that supports the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421. The guide hole 12413 differs from the guide hole 12413 of the tenth embodiment only in the extending direction.

  The guide hole 12413 in this embodiment is composed of three regions that are separated in the extending direction. That is, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 86, a first area A1 disposed outside the main body member 12410 in the left-right direction, a second area A2 connected to an inner portion of the first area A1, and It mainly includes a third area A3 extending from the upper end of the second area A2 toward the inside of the main body member 12410 in the left-right direction.

  The first region A1 is a region formed by an extending direction that is inclined upward toward the inside of the main body member 12410 in the left and right direction. With the insertion shaft portion 10421c arranged at the outer end of the first area A1, the body member 12410 is arranged at the retracted position or the intermediate position. The inclination angle of the first region A1 is about 0 degree, which is smaller than 45 degrees, which is the inclination angle of the guide hole 10413 in the tenth embodiment.

  The second area A2 is an area extending vertically upward from the inner end of the first area A1 in the left-right direction. Further, the third region is a region extending from the inner surface of the upper end portion in the left-right direction of the second region A2 toward the inner side of the main body member 12410 in the left-right direction at an inclination angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left-right direction.

  That is, the third area A3 is formed by a shape in which the upper end portion of the guide hole 12413 in the tenth embodiment is connected to the second area A2. In addition, the extension length of the third region A3 is about the radius of the insertion shaft portion 10421c.

  A case where the main body member 12410 of the combined operation unit 12400 descends from the retracted position (see FIG. 66) will be described. In this embodiment, the inclination angle of the guide hole 12413 is shallower in the vertical direction, which is about 0 degrees, as compared with the 45 degrees in the tenth embodiment. Therefore, while the vertical displacement of the main body member 12410 is short, The swing base member 10421 can be rotated by a large angle. Thereby, the operation speed of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 can be increased, and the effect of the operation of the decoration member 422 can be improved.

  Further, since the swing base member 10421 quickly changes its posture to the vicinity of the abutting state, as compared with the tenth embodiment, the swing base member 10421 can be visually recognized integrally with the swinging member 430 until a state near the posture (abutting state). When the main body member 12410 is moved down, the swinging member 430 is raised (moves in the direction in which the upper end portion tilts backward (the direction in which the upper end portion tilts backward in the plane of FIG. 88)). In addition, even if the timing of operating the swinging member 430 is slightly shifted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gap between the operating member 430 and the decorative member 422 is visually recognized by the player. That is, by arranging the decoration member 422 near the contact state at an early stage, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the timing of operating the operation member 430.

  Further, as the operation speeds of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are increased, the speed at which the center of gravity position G10 moves in the left-right direction can be increased as compared with the tenth embodiment, and the center of gravity position G10 is It is possible to lengthen the period in which the insertion shaft portion 10421c is arranged outside in the left-right direction. This makes it possible to extend the period in which the moment of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 centering on the insertion shaft portion 10421c is positive in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and reduces the load applied to the connecting member 423. be able to.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the oscillating base member 10421 has a lateral outside portion downward and a lateral inside portion centered on the insertion shaft portion 10421c due to a gravitational load applied to its center of gravity G10. A moment in the direction of rotation is applied in a manner that moves upward. At this time, an upward load is applied to the connecting portion (the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 69)) between the swing base member 10421 and the connecting member 423 along the circumferential direction of the circle centered on the insertion shaft portion 10421c. To be Therefore, since the downward load applied to the connecting member 423 can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the connecting member 423 from being damaged.

  When the main body member 12410 descends from the state shown in FIG. 87, the posture of the swing base member 10421 is maintained for a while. After that, as shown in FIG. 88, the pair of right and left swing base members 10421 and the decorative member 422 are abutted in the left and right direction. Therefore, as compared with the case where the swing base member 10421 is continuously moved in the left and right direction and abutted. The impact at the time of contact can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the swing base member 10421 from separating due to the impact of the contact, and it is possible to make the decorative member 422 easily visible as a unit immediately after the contact state.

  A case where the main body member 12410 of the combined operation unit 12400 moves up from the projecting position (see FIG. 88) will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, when the main body member 12410 is arranged in the projecting position, the insertion shaft portion 10421c is housed in the third area A3 of the guide hole 12413.

  Here, since the second area A2 connected to the third area A3 extends vertically downward, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c is displaced toward the second area A2 side, a member that supports the insertion shaft portion 10421c from below is formed. Since nothing is lost, the weights of the swing base member 10421 and the decoration member 422 are supported only by the connecting member 423, which may damage the connecting member 423.

  According to the present embodiment, the center of gravity position G10 is arranged outward in the left-right direction with respect to the insertion shaft portion 10421c, so that the left insertion shaft portion 10421c is centered on the left member of the swing base member 10421. As a result, a load is caused to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view, and a load is caused to rotate in the clockwise direction in front view around the right insertion shaft portion 10421c in the right member. A pair of rocking base members 10421 are coaxially supported in the left and right central portions, and the pair of left and right rocking base members 10421 form an abutting state in such a manner that they rotate relative to each other. Therefore, the center of gravity position G10 of each of the left and right swing base members 10421 is arranged at a position to rotate in the direction in which the pair of swing base members 10421 are maintained in the contact state.

  In order to move the insertion shaft portion 10421c arranged in the third area A3 to the second area A2, it is necessary to change the posture of the pair of swing base members 10421 from the contact state to the separated state (see FIG. 86). However, as described above, according to the present embodiment, due to the disposition of the center of gravity position G10, the own weight acts in a direction in which the abutting state of the pair of swing base members 10421 is maintained. Accordingly, the insertion shaft portion 10421c can be prevented from being pushed out to the second area A2, and the swing base member 10421 can be easily supported by the main body member 12410. Therefore, damage to the connecting member 423 can be avoided. be able to.

  When the main body member 12410 is started from the extended position, the main body member 12410 lifts the insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421, and the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves from the third area A3 of the guide hole 12413 to the second area A2. Pushed out.

  Here, according to the shape of the third region A3 of the guide hole 12413, the load that pushes the insertion shaft portion 10421c from the third region A3 to the second region A2 causes the insertion shaft portion 10421c to move in the same region in the tenth embodiment. It is similar to the pushing load. Therefore, the load at the time of rising start does not change between the tenth embodiment and the twelfth embodiment.

  On the other hand, after the insertion shaft portion 10421c is pushed into the second area A2, the main body member 12410 can be moved up while the placement of the insertion shaft portion 10421c is maintained. The driving force of the driving motor 462 (see FIG. 65) to be operated can be reduced as compared with the tenth embodiment.

  In addition, when the insertion shaft portion 10421c is arranged in the second area A2, the weight of the shielding member 10420 is not loaded on the main body member 12410 because the second area A2 is extended in the vertical direction. As compared with the case where the weight is applied, the lifting operation of the main body member 12410 can be performed smoothly.

  With reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, regarding the operating speed of the main body member 12410 and the swing base member 10421 when the main body member 12410 moves from the state shown in FIG. 87 toward the intermediate position in the present embodiment. explain.

  The insertion shaft portion 10421c of the swing base member 10421 moves on a movement locus R12 along a circular orbit centered on the shaft support rod 423c (see FIG. 69). In FIG. 87, the angle formed by this circular orbit and the first region A1 extending linearly is approximately 45 degrees. Further, the main body member 12410 operates in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first area A1.

  Therefore, when the main body member 12410 rises by the vertical distance Y12 from the state shown in FIG. 87, the insertion shaft portion 10421c moves horizontally by the horizontal distance X12, where the vertical displacement and the horizontal direction Is substantially the same (Y12≈X12).

  In other words, when the main body member 12410 is moved up to the intermediate position, the displacement amount of the upward displacement of the main body member 12410 and the displacement amount of the upward displacement of the insertion shaft portion 10421c become the same, and further, the displacement amount and the insertion shaft portion. The amount of displacement of 10421c in the left-right direction is the same.

  That is, since the ascending speed of the main body member 12410 and the horizontal movement speed of the insertion shaft portion 10421c can be made the same, a sense of unity of operation of the main body member 12410 with the swing base member 10421 and the decorative member 422 is produced. can do.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the pair of decorative members 422 of the combined operation unit 400 swing to form the gap has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decoration member 422 may be guided to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decoration members 422 may be slid in a direction in which they are separated from each other to form a gap for housing the swinging member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be ensured in the vertical direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the board lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a long plate-shaped movable member that is pivotally supported on the inner side surfaces of the pair of step portions 324a and is formed in a pair of left and right is provided, and the movable member is in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. A closed state that is arranged in a posture that extends along the longitudinal direction to prevent passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and an open state that is swung in an ascending or descending direction from that state to allow the ball to pass to the specific winning opening 65a. The state and may be formed. Moreover, you may comprise not the specific winning a prize mouth 65a but the 2nd winning a prize mouth 640 by the same structure.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting device 331c is reflected to the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 of the board lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Not a thing. For example, a portion that reflects the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 is in an extended state may be formed below the movable upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light effect can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the alignment portion 543 is combined with the moving member 540 of the swing motion unit 500 by the concave-convex fitting has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be disposed at a position where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be combined by magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force, and it becomes unnecessary for the driving device 550 to generate the holding force when the moving members 540 are arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, the power consumption of the driving device 550 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the combined operation unit 400 is formed in a linear shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be moderated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the swinging member 430 may include a slide member that slides in a direction away from the main body member 410, and the decoration member 422 may be housed between the slide member and the main body member 410.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 of the combined operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 required for housing the wiring guide arm 480 outside the opening 211a can be narrowed. Thereby, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by the pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by a plurality of three or more arm members. In this case, for example, the bridging members 528, 2528, and 7528 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate arm member, and the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 are arranged so as to cover the front side of the arm members at both ends, thereby suppressing the positional deviation between the arm members. Can be improved. That is, of the arm members at both ends, one arm member pushes one end of the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528, and when the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 bend, the other end of It moves toward the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. In this way, the arm members at both ends work to suppress the bending of the bridging members 528, 2528, and 7528, and as a result, the displacement of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed and the posture of the moving member 540 can be stabilized. Can be made.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 has a columnar portion (for example, the one side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion ( For example, although the case of being pivotally supported by the other-side tubular portion 481c) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion that supports the cylindrical portion may be formed by a long hole that extends in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction of the guide arms 481 to 483, the horizontal expansion and contraction of the guide arms 481 to 483 in the extending direction of the elongated hole can be performed.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) forming the wiring guide arm 480 is used. Although the case where the width is shorter than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may be made wider than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from sliding down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

  In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than that of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d has been described, but the width is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be made longer than the widths of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hooking with a finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, cases have been described in which the widths of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d are constant, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, portions of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f is fixed may be formed to have the same width as the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than that of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be projected from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with the finger (hooking with the finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be increased as compared with the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made larger than the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 that occurs when the connecting member 423 moves.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a recess that can accommodate the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper side surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft 421c is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is provided only at the extended end portion of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a direction changing portion 8013c may be additionally provided in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b. In this case, the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c arranged in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b to the front side and the light passing through the direction changing portion 8013c and arranged at the extended end portion of the light projecting passage 8013b are arranged. The light can be divided into light that is reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights visually recognized in a front view can be increased with respect to the number of the light irradiation devices 8610. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of light irradiation devices 8610 provided while maintaining the effect of the light irradiation devices 8610.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the pair of transmission convex portions 723 are arranged on the disc member 720 of the two-way operation unit 700 and the transmission convex portions 723 contacting the operation member 750 are replaced on the way has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, of the pair of transmission protrusions 723, the formation of one of the transmission protrusions 723 is omitted, and under the situation where only one transmission protrusion 723 abuts on the operating member 750, the contact member 753 of the operating member 750. It is also possible to dispose a support member that supports the contact member 753 above the rotary shaft 722 of the disk member 720 by supporting the contact member 753 from below. In this case, when the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged above the rotation shaft 722, the contact member 753 and the transmission protrusion 723 contact each other, and the transmission protrusion 723 is arranged below the rotation shaft 722. The contact member 753 is prevented from falling to the support member (stops there). Accordingly, when the operation member 750 is moved by the transmission convex portion 723, it is possible to suppress the change in the operation speed of the operation member 750, and even when the operation member 750 is prevented from being lowered by the support member and is stopped, Since the operating speed is 0, it is possible to suppress changes in the operating speed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the transmission convex portion 723 of the two-way operation unit 700 abuts only from below the abutting member 753 of the operating member 750 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the transmission convex portion 723 is configured by a single convex portion instead of a pair, and the contact member 753 is configured by a long hole that accommodates the transmission convex portion 723, and the upper side surface and the lower side surface of the long hole. And are composed of vertically symmetrical curved shapes, and when the transmission convex portion 723 moves above the rotation shaft 722, they contact the upper side surface, and when the transmission convex portion 723 moves below the rotation shaft 722, The natural length of the coil spring CS10 may be set so as to come into contact with the lower side surface. In this case, of the side surfaces of the contact member 753, the upper side surface is formed into a shape that suppresses fluctuations in speed when the transmission protrusion 723 moves above the rotation shaft 722, while the lower side surface is formed into a transmission protrusion. When the portion 723 moves below the rotation shaft 722, it can have a shape that suppresses the fluctuation of the speed. Therefore, the change of the operation speed of the operation member 750 can be suppressed during the entire rotation of the disc member 720. Can be suppressed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the operating member 750 slides along the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operating member 750 may operate along a curved line. In this case, the operation mode of the operation member 750 can be diversified, and the types of effects can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the transmission convex portions 723 are configured as a pair has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more (for example, three) transmission protrusions 723 may be arranged. In this case, the reciprocating operation speed of the operation member 750 when rotating the disk member 720 at the same speed can be increased as compared with the case where the transmission convex portions 723 are configured in a pair.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the swing base member 10421 is tilted and the swing base member 10421 is separated from the main body member 10410 by disposing the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400 at the intermediate position has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing base member 10421 is pressed against the main body member 10410 by a spring or the like in a state where the main body member 10410 is arranged in the retracted position, and the degree of pressing while the main body member 10410 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position ( In the state where the load) is relaxed and the main body member 10410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the pressing load may be released. In this case, while the main body member 10410 moves between the retracted position and the intermediate position, even if vibration occurs due to a game machine being hit, the swing base member 10421 causes the main body member 10421 to move due to the pressing load. It is possible to prevent separation from 10410.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400 moves up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body member 10410 may move in the left-right direction. In this case, the influence of gravity exerted on the main body member 10410 and the swing base member 10421 can be reduced.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the connecting members 423 do not abut each other at the intersecting portion has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the main body member 10410 is arranged at the intermediate position and the connecting members 423 intersect in a front view, they may contact each other in the front and rear. In this case, as the connecting members 423 abut each other and rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, the swing base member 10421 rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction. One swing base member 10421 can be separated from the main body member 10410, and the other swing base member 10421 can be pressed against the main body member 10410. As a result, the swing base member 10421 can be made to produce an effect that is not uniform on the left and right.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the swing base member 10421 moves by being hung from the connecting member 423 while the main body member 10410 is moving has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rocking base member 10421 may be moved by a collision unit that is supported by the rear case 210 and projects toward the rocking base member 10421 at the operation timing of the rocking base member 10421 to collide with the rocking base member 10421. In this case, since the moving speed of the swing base member 10421 depends on the operation speed of the collision means, it is possible to cause the swing base member 10421 to have an effect unrelated to the operation speed of the main body member 10410. In this case, if the impact when the impact means impacts the swing base member 10421 is excessive, the performance is hindered. Therefore, it is desirable to use a member having a high cushioning property to mitigate the impact at the time of impact.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the center of gravity position G10 of “one member of the shielding member 10420” is reversed left and right with the insertion shaft portion 10421c as a boundary during the movement of the main body member 10410 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the center of gravity position G10 may be maintained on one side of the insertion shaft portion 10421c.

  In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the swing base member 10421 moves relative to the main body member 10410 on a plane parallel to the moving surface of the main body member 10410 of the combined operation unit 10400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the swing base member 10421 may move relative to the main body member 10410 on a surface that intersects the moving surface of the main body member 10410. In this case, a three-dimensional effect can be performed. In the tenth embodiment, as an example, the inclined surface 10447 of the holding and fixing portion 446 attaches the main body member 10410 to the upper and lower planes in an inclined manner, and the swing base member 10421 is mounted on the inclined surface 10447. Movement relative to member 10410 is described.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by devising the shape of the contact member 11753 of the operating member 11750 of the two-way operating unit 11700, the operating member 11750 is linearly slid at a constant speed while rotating the disk member 720 at a constant speed. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operating member 11750 may be slid by a timing belt rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 741. In this case, the operating member 11750 can be slid at a constant speed without forming a complicated shape on a part of the operating member 11750.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the guide hole 11413 is configured as a through hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the guide hole 11413 may be configured as a bottomed hole, and the bottom portion may be configured to project toward the front side toward the left-right center of the main body member 11410. In this case, the gap portion of the main body member 11410 can be reduced, and the durability of the main body member 11410 can be improved.

  Further, as compared with the case where the insertion shaft portion 11421c is axially supported, the possibility that the insertion shaft portion 11421c is displaced in the axial direction can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of the shape of the connection portion of the insertion shaft portion 11421c with the guide hole 11413 is increased. Can be improved. For example, by forming the connecting portion of the insertion shaft portion 11421c with the guide hole 11413 into a spherical shape and connecting the insertion shaft portion 11421c in a manner like a ball joint, the swing base member 10421 or the decorative member supported by the insertion shaft portion 11421c. The degree of freedom of the posture of 422 can be improved.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Example of technical idea in which moving member is housed between member that tilts forward and base member>
A first moving member formed to be movable between a retracted position formed outside the liquid crystal display device and an extended position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and relatively movable with the first moving member. And a second moving member disposed on the front side of the first moving member, the first moving member forming a superposed portion that overlaps with the second moving member in a front view, In the gaming machine, the area of the overlapping portion is larger when the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position than when the first moving member is arranged at the projecting position. An auxiliary member that is disposed on a side and is movable in a direction in which the first moving member approaches and separates from the first moving member, and the first moving member is in a state in which the first moving member is arranged in the retracted position. The second moving member between the auxiliary member and the auxiliary member. Gaming machine A1, wherein is that the.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members are arranged at the front and rear, and a large overlapping portion is formed at the retracted position to reduce the area viewed from the front of the plurality of moving members. At the exit position, there is a gaming machine in which a large production area is ensured by forming the overlapping portion smaller than the retreat position (for example, see JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to avoid interference between the front-side moving member and the back-side moving member, the overlapping portion is formed flat especially at the retracted position of the back-side moving member. Therefore, there is a problem in that the effect of the moving member on the back side at the projecting position is limited to a planar effect, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Here, as a method for solving the problem that the effect is limited to a flat one, for example, a method of forming a moving member on the front side three-dimensionally toward the front side can be considered. However, in this case, since the front side space of the front side moving member is limited, it is not possible to form a front-back difference enough to form the rear side moving member in three dimensions.

  Further, as a method of solving the problem that the effect is limited to a flat one, for example, a portion which does not overlap with the front moving member is formed on the rear moving member, and the rear moving member moves from the rear moving member to the front. A method of arranging a member that moves toward and away from each other is conceivable. However, in this case, the portion of the rear-side moving member provided as a portion that does not overlap the front-side moving member is projected to the outside of the front-side moving member when the moving member is arranged in the retracted position. This makes it difficult to narrow the space for disposing the front-side moving member and the back-side moving member in the retracted position, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for disposing the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member so as to be movable toward and away from the first moving member, and the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, the second moving member can be housed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interference between the auxiliary member arranged on the first moving member and the second moving member, to narrow the arrangement space for these members, and to arrange the auxiliary member on the front side of the second moving member. Compared with the case where it is installed, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional effect using a wider front and rear space.

  Further, in the projecting state in which the second moving member is not accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the auxiliary member is placed close to the first moving member, so that the first moving member and the auxiliary member are separated from each other. The dead space can be suppressed, and it is possible to easily dispose another member on the front side of the auxiliary member.

  The manner of moving the auxiliary member is not particularly limited, and may be a mode in which the moving direction is formed by one axis such as sliding movement, a mode in which the rotation axis is defined and rotates about the rotation axis, or a combination thereof. good.

  In the gaming machine A1, the first moving member includes a first supporting portion that supports the auxiliary member, and the first supporting portion is such that the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position and the second movement is performed. A member is supported between the first moving member and the auxiliary member at an end opposite to the end where the accommodation is started, and a driving force is applied to a point near the first support with the first support as a fulcrum. The gaming machine A2, in which the auxiliary member is swung so that the end of the auxiliary member on the side of the second moving member moves toward and away from the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the swinging movement of the auxiliary member with the first support portion as a fulcrum causes the end portion of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side to separate from the first moving member. As a result, a space that houses the second moving member is formed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member.

  Here, the first support portion swings the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion where the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position and the second moving member starts to be housed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Support movably. Therefore, even if the movement amount of the first support portion of the auxiliary member is small, the movement amount of the end portion of the auxiliary member that accommodates the second moving member can be increased.

  In this case, the driving force is applied to a point near the first supporting portion of the auxiliary member to swing the auxiliary member, so that the second moving member is compared with the driving distance at a point near the first supporting portion of the auxiliary member. The end portion of the auxiliary member on the side of housing can be largely separated from the first moving member.

  Therefore, contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to achieve both suppression of the driving distance of the auxiliary member and prevention of contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the side surface of the second moving member opposite to the auxiliary member has a side end closer to the first support portion than a side away from the first support portion. A gaming machine A3, which is arranged closer to the first moving member than the end portion.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when the second moving member starts to be housed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the gaming machine A3 approaches the first supporting portion of the second moving member. It is started to be accommodated from the end portion on the side, that is, the end portion on the side that is arranged in the vicinity of the first moving member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a gap between the second moving member and the auxiliary member when the second moving member starts to be housed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from colliding with the first moving member or the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machines A2 and A3, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members movably supported by a second support portion formed at an end portion on the side away from the auxiliary member, and the pair of first and second members is movably supported. Each of the two moving members is formed so as to be movable in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and at least a part of the auxiliary member can be housed between the pair of second moving members by the moving operation. A game machine A4 characterized by.

  Here, for example, when the mechanism portion for swinging the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member, the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member is increased (first In order to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other in the moving direction of the moving member), it is conceivable to arrange the second moving member on the front side of the mechanical portion. On the other hand, in this case, it is necessary to move the auxiliary member that accommodates the second moving member toward the front side (direction away from the first moving member), so that the space on the front side of the auxiliary member is suppressed and the auxiliary member is It becomes difficult to form three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 and A3, at least a part of the auxiliary member is housed in a space generated by the pair of second moving members being separated from each other. You can This eliminates the need to move the second moving member to the front side of the mechanism portion of the auxiliary member in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. It can be arranged close to the first moving member. Thereby, the auxiliary member can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

  The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, characterized in that the first support portion is disposed on a side of the auxiliary member that is close to the liquid crystal display device.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is disposed on the side of the auxiliary member that is close to the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position and the auxiliary member is swung in the direction away from the first moving member, so that the display surface formed on the auxiliary member is located inside the liquid crystal display device (game). Person side). Thereby, when the first moving member is moved to the retracted position, the display surface of the auxiliary member can be directed to the player side, and the effect of the auxiliary member can be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of increasing the distance between the first moving member and the end of the auxiliary member on the side where the second moving member starts to be housed, and for the purpose of directing the display surface of the auxiliary member toward the player. Can be combined.

<Example of technical idea for suppressing bouncing of moving member>
A first moving member movably formed, a base member formed so that the first moving member is relatively movable, and a second moving member whose one end is guideably connected to the first moving member. And a connecting member having one end supported by the other end of the second moving member and the other end guideably connected to the base member, and a driving force for moving the first moving member. A drive device for generating the second moving member and the connecting member by the movement of the first moving member, the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member. When either one reaches the end position of the guided range, one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member causes the other end of the second moving member. And of the support point at the one end of the connecting member Gaming machine B1, characterized in that guided in the direction including the dynamic direction of the vertical component.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first moving member, a second moving member whose one end is guideably connected to the first moving member, and one of the other end of the second moving member. A connecting member having an end portion supported and the other end portion guideably connected to the base member, and a drive device for driving the first moving member are provided, and the second moving member and the connecting member are connected by the movement of the first moving member. There is a gaming machine in which the member is moved and arranged at different timings at the end positions in the range where one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member are guided (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008- 194313). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the first moving member is moved, one of the end portions of the second moving member or the other end portion of the connecting member reaches the end of the movable range first. When the end reaches the end position of the movable range, the support points of the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member bounce back in the direction opposite to the previous moving direction. In this case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the second moving member and the connecting member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when either the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position of the guided range, the second moving member The one end or the other end of the connecting member is guided in a direction including a vertical component of the moving direction of the support point at the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member. It Thereby, the direction in which the support point at the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member bounce back and the guiding direction of the one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member are set. The intersection occurs, and resistance is generated in the second moving member or the connecting member. Due to this resistance, the support points at the other end of the second moving member and the one end of the connecting member are suppressed from bouncing back. Therefore, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  It should be noted that the connecting member and the second moving member may be fixed in that they are supported by each other. That is, the connecting member and the second moving member may be integrally handled.

  In the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path that guides the other end of the connecting member, and the guide path is such that the other end of the connecting member is at least one of the guide paths of the base member. When the end point of the connecting member is reached and the supporting point bounces off, the side surface on the side receiving the other end of the connecting member suppresses the movement of the other end of the connecting member along the guide path. A gaming machine B2, which is provided with a section.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the base member includes a guide path that guides the other end of the connecting member. The guide path is connected to the side surface on the side that receives the other end of the connecting member when the other end of the connecting member reaches at least one end position in the guide direction of the base member and the supporting point bounces back. A braking unit that suppresses movement of the other end of the member along the guide path is provided.

  Therefore, the other end of the connecting member guides the base member while suppressing the resistance of the connecting member in the guiding direction until the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position in the guiding direction of the base member. After reaching the end position in the direction, the effect of braking the other end of the connecting member can be produced.

  The braking portion formed on the side surface of the guide path may be a recessed portion that can partially accommodate the other end of the connecting member, a high friction portion whose friction resistance is increased by the embossing, or a spring member. A spring portion or the like to which an elastic force is applied is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members arranged in parallel in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point, and the one end of the second moving member is guided. The direction of the direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point is the opposite direction of the pair of second moving members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the guide direction of one end of the second moving member have a pair of directions. The second moving members are formed in directions opposite to each other. Therefore, as one end of the pair of second moving members moves while being guided by the first moving member, the other end of the second moving member is loaded along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point. Power is offset. With this, it is possible to prevent the other end of the second moving member from being displaced in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point during the movement of the first moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes a pair of guide paths that guide the other end of the connecting member, and the connecting member has the other end guided by the separate guide paths. The pair of connecting members, the other end of the connecting member along the guide path when the other end reaches the end position of the guide path. A gaming machine B4, in which the direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support points in the bounceable directions are opposite to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the end position of the guide path of the base member, the other connecting member The direction components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support points in the directions in which the ends of the can rebound along the guide path are opposite to each other.

  In this case, the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the end position of the guide path of the base member, and the support point of the pair of connecting members with the second moving member is in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction up to then. When they are moved (positional deviation), one of the pair of connecting members is pressed against the end of the guide path of the base member, and the movement resistance of the pair of connecting members increases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the support points of the second moving member and the pair of connecting members from moving (displacement) in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction up to that point. Thereby, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B4, the pair of connecting members has an intermediate portion formed between the one end portion and the other end portion, the one end portion and the other end portion of the connecting member. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the side away from the second moving member as compared with the connecting straight line.

  Here, for example, when the connecting member is formed of a linear plate-shaped member, when the pair of connecting members are arranged at the end positions on the side projecting toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device, one of the connecting members When the end portion of is moved, the distance between the connecting member and the second moving member is narrowed, and the connecting member and the second moving member may come into contact with each other.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the intermediate portion of the connecting member is the second as compared with the straight line connecting one end and the other end of the pair of connecting members. It is arranged on the side away from the moving member.

  Therefore, when the pair of connecting members are arranged at the end position of the movable range on the side projecting inward toward the liquid crystal display device, even if one end of the connecting member is moved, the connecting member and the second A sufficient distance from the moving member can be secured, and the connecting member can be prevented from coming into contact with the second moving member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the second moving member can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members, and the one end of the second moving member is arranged at at least one end position in the guide direction. Thus, the pair of second moving members are abutted, the gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, one end portion of the pair of second moving members is arranged at at least one end position in the guide direction, thereby forming a pair. The second moving member of is abutted. Therefore, the positional deviation of one of the pair of second moving members can be corrected by the contact with the other second moving member. That is, since the pair of second moving members are in a relationship of mutually correcting the positional deviation, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement of the second moving members.

<Example of technical idea in which wiring is arranged along movable member>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member that is movable and wiring connected to the movable member, one end is connected to the movable member, and the other end is outside the liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine C1 including a wiring auxiliary member that is connected to the back case and is formed to be expandable and contractible, and the wiring is arranged along the wiring auxiliary member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which electric wiring is arranged from the rear case to the moving member without support (for example, see JP 2011-245160 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the wiring takes an unexpected arrangement when the moving member moves, and for example, the wiring rubs against another member, or the wiring is sandwiched by another member, which causes the durability. There was a problem that there was a risk of loss of sex.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the wiring is arranged along the wiring auxiliary member that connects the rear case and the moving member, so that the arrangement of the wiring can be predicted and the wiring can be different from other members. It is possible to prevent rubbing or the wiring being sandwiched by other members. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In addition, as a mode of expansion and contraction, a folding type expansion / contraction, a sliding type expansion / contraction, and a bellows expansion / contraction are exemplified.

  Examples of the wiring include round wire wiring and flat harnesses. The flat harness has an advantage that it can be set so as to bend around a certain axis as compared with a round wire.

  In the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm member includes a long rod-shaped connecting rod portion and a short side of the connecting rod portion at least one end of the connecting rod portion. And a supporting portion which is formed in a columnar shape or a cylindrical shape having an axis in a direction and which rotatably supports the arm members, and the wiring is arranged so as to wrap around the supporting portion. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member is formed of a plurality of arm members rotatably supported by the supporting portion formed at the end, and the wiring is supporting portion. Since the arm members are arranged so as to wrap around, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent at an acute angle due to the rotation of the arm members.

  In the gaming machine C2, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, the pair of side wall portions are arranged vertically, and are formed in a lower portion of the pair of side wall portions. The width of the side wall portion formed is made longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above, and the width of at least one side wall portion is made shorter than the width dimension of the wiring. .

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, it is possible to easily attach and detach the wiring at the time of manufacturing or repairing the gaming machine.

  Here, in order to easily attach and detach the wiring from the arm member, it is effective to set the width of the pair of side wall portions of the arm member to be equal to or less than the width dimension of the wiring member and to protrude the wiring member from the arm member. . However, if the width of the side wall is too short, the wiring may fall off the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, at least one of the side wall portions has a width shorter than the width dimension of the wiring, and the width of the side wall portion formed below is longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above. It is formed. Thereby, the area of the side wall portion of the arm member that supports the wire pressed downward by gravity is secured, and the wire can be easily attached to and detached from the arm member while preventing the wire from falling off from the arm member. .

  In the gaming machine C3, the plurality of arm members include a bottom portion that connects one end of the pair of side wall portions in the lateral direction, and the wiring has a concave cross-section portion formed by the bottom portion and the side wall portion. The support portion includes a lid member disposed at a tip opposite to the bottom portion, and the lid member is disposed at least from the support portion so as to face the support portion and the wiring is provided in the support portion. A gaming machine C4, which is extended to a position overlapping with the wiring toward the side wall portion sandwiched between the gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the arm member forms a concave cross section with the pair of side wall portions and the bottom portion, the wiring is accommodated in the concave cross section portion, and the lid member is provided at the tip end portion on the side opposite to the bottom portion of the support portion. To be done. The lid member extends from at least the support portion toward a side wall portion that is arranged to face the support portion and sandwiches the wiring between the support portion and a position that overlaps the wiring. As a result, even if the wiring is about to fall off from the pair of side wall portions, the lid member is caught by the wiring.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, when the arm members are rotated, the wiring bends in the axial direction of the rotation shaft, and the wiring is likely to be displaced. The lid member can prevent the wiring from falling off the arm member.

  Further, by disposing the lid member on the support portion where the pair of arm members are mutually supported, it is possible to suppress the number of the lid members provided. That is, when the lid member is formed in the middle of the arm members, it is necessary to form the lid member on each of the pair of arm members, and the number of the provided lid members is the same as the number of the arm members. On the other hand, by disposing the lid member on the support portion, the number of the lid members provided can be reduced by one from the number of the plurality of arm members to be connected.

  In the gaming machine C4, the lengths of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other in the longitudinal direction are different from each other by more than the length of the lid member formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm member. A gaming machine C5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the lengths of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other differ by more than the length of the lid member formed along the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the lid members fixed to the support portions of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other can be shifted in the longitudinal direction of the arm members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lid members from interfering with each other when the adjacent arm members are arranged close to each other. In this case, both the provision of the arm member in a space-saving manner and the prevention of the disconnection of the wiring by enlarging the cover member can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the arm member is provided around a shaft bottom portion extending from the connecting rod portion side beyond the support portion along the longitudinal direction of the bottom portion, and around the support portion. A wall portion formed in a wall shape, wherein the arm members are pivotally supported relative to each other in the support portion, and the shaft bottom portion is in a rotational direction in which the arm members pivotally supported away from each other. When arranged at the end position, the arm member is formed so as to be capable of contacting in the rotation direction of the arm member, and the wall portion is arranged at the end position in the rotation direction in which the arm members pivotally supported mutually separate from each other. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that a gap is formed in the turning direction of the arm member when the gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the arm members are rotatably supported in the support portion so that the arm member extends from the connecting rod portion side along the longitudinal direction of the bottom portion, and the shaft bottom portion exceeds the support portion. Formed. Therefore, the shaft bottoms of the support portions are brought into contact with each other at the end positions in the rotation direction in which the arm members that are axially supported are separated from each other, so that the arm members are rotated beyond the state where they are arranged in a straight line. Is prevented.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the rotation angle of the arm member is regulated and the wiring is prevented from bending in the opposite direction, so that the wiring is disconnected. Can be prevented.

  Since a gap is formed in the wall portion in the rotation direction at the end position in the rotation direction where the arm members are separated from each other, even if the wiring bends and comes close to the wall portion, the wiring is sandwiched by the wall portion. It is possible to prevent disconnection.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the supporting portion near the contracted state of the wiring auxiliary member is suppressed as compared with the rotational friction generated in the supporting portion near the expanded state of the auxiliary member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion in the vicinity of the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member causes the rotation generated in the support portion in the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Since it is suppressed as compared with friction, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated in the support portion when the moving member moves in a mode of deforming the wiring auxiliary member from the contracted state to the expanded state, and the movement of the moving member It is possible to suppress the driving force required for the.

  In addition, when the moving member moves at a high speed, when the wiring auxiliary member approaches the extended state, the rotational friction at the support portion increases, so that the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member can be slowed down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring auxiliary member from reaching the stretched state while the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member is high and bending the pair of arm members to the opposite side due to the force.

  As a method of changing the rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring assisting member, the pillars of the support portion and the sliding surface of the cylinder are partially provided with depressions or holes for suppressing mutual contact. Another example is a method of changing the area where the recesses and holes formed in the cylinder overlap on the sliding surface depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. In this case, the smaller the overlapping area of the recesses and holes formed on the pillar and the cylinder of the support portion on the sliding surface, the more the rotational friction can be suppressed (the more overlapping the recesses and holes, the contact area between the pillar and the cylinder). Becomes larger and the rotational friction becomes larger).

  Here, for example, in the case where a hollow is formed in each of the cylinder and the column by half circumference, when the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the pillar completely overlap with each other, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the pillar in the remaining half circumference. On the other hand, if the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the pillar do not overlap, the hollow is formed over the entire circumference of the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction is suppressed over the entire circumference. When the hollow of the cylinder and the hollow of the pillar partially overlap with each other, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the pillar in a region narrower than half the circumference. In this way, by changing the formation range of the depression on the sliding surface, it is possible to change the rotational friction between the cylinder and the column.

  Further, instead of the depressions and holes, a method of spraying powder on the sliding surface to partially form a satin-finished surface is exemplified. Since a plurality of powders are dispersed and arranged on the surface of the matte surface to form an uneven surface, the larger the area of the matte surface on the sliding surface, the more the rotational friction can be increased. The smaller the overlapping area of the matte surface formed on the pillar and the cylinder, the larger the total area of the matte surface that is effective for the rotational friction on the sliding surface, and thus the rotational friction between the pillar and the cylinder can be increased.

  Further, a method of attaching a tape having a low coefficient of friction instead of the depressions or holes is exemplified. On the sliding surface, the smaller the overlapping area of the tapes attached to the columns and cylinders of the support, the larger the total area of the tapes attached to the sliding surface that is effective for the rotational friction. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a column shape includes a first non-contact portion in which formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the support portion formed in a cylindrical shape forms the inner peripheral side surface. A second non-contact part is partially omitted, and the first non-contact part and the second non-contact part are arranged so as to partially overlap each other in the radial direction in a state where the arm members are supported by each other. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the overlapping area thereof is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the expanded state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Here, in order to change the rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, for example, when the support portion is subjected to embossing, the surface shape is smoothed by the friction due to the rotation of the support portion (planar surface). And there is a problem with durability. Further, for example, when a tape having a low friction is attached, the tape may be peeled off due to the rotation of the supporting portion, which causes a problem in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape is provided with the first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the gaming machine C8 has a tubular shape. The formed support portion includes a second non-contact portion in which formation of the inner peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion do not contact each other. The area in which the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion overlap in the radial direction is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the expanded state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the contracted state.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is compared with the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  Since the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion can be easily manufactured in the same shape by manufacturing a mold, it is possible to change the rotational friction of the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be easily achieved.

  Examples of the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion include a recess formed in the sliding surface of the support portion and a hole formed in the sliding surface of the support portion.

  In the gaming machines C2 to C8, a front locking member that is detachably fixed to the connecting rod portion is provided, and the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction, and the front face is provided. The gaming machine C9, wherein the locking member is detachably fixed to a lateral end of one of the side walls and is formed so as to project toward the other side wall.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and one of the pair of side wall portions is formed. And a front locking member that is detachably fixed to an end portion of the side wall portion in the short side direction and that is formed to project toward the other side wall portion together with the flow.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C8, the wiring is prevented from dropping from the connecting rod portion when the front locking portion is attached, and the wiring is connected to the connecting rod portion when removed. Can be pulled out easily.

  Thus, when the moving member is in operation, the front locking portion is attached to prevent the wiring from falling off, and when the moving member is stopped (for example, during maintenance), the front locking portion is removed to facilitate wiring exchange. be able to.

  In the gaming machine C9, the front locking member includes at least a pair of arm portions, and when the front locking member is fixed to the one side wall portion, the one side wall portion forms the pair of side walls. The gaming machine C10, wherein the one side wall portion is sandwiched by an arm portion, and the one side wall portion includes a fitting recess formed as a recess into which the arm portion can be fitted.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C9, one side wall portion is clamped by the arm portion of the front locking member, and at that time, the arm portion is fitted into the fitting recess, whereby the front locking is achieved. It is possible to prevent the member from slidingly moving in the longitudinal direction of the one side wall portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front locking member from being displaced from the side wall portion.

  As a method for preventing the front locking member from coming off from the side wall portion, the arm portion of the front locking member is extended beyond the widthwise length of the side wall portion, and the extended end portions thereof are arranged to face each other. An example is a method in which a protruding portion is provided so as to protrude toward the arm portion, and the retaining portion is retained by hooking the protruding portion on the side wall portion. In addition, a hook-shaped retainer that holds the front locking member in the direction opposite to the pull-out direction from the side wall is formed. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C10, the pair of arm portions are formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess is formed as a recess extending in a semicircular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C10, the arm portion is formed in a cylindrical shape and the fitting recess is formed in a semicircular cross section, so that one side wall portion is sandwiched between the pair of arm portions. When the arm part is fitted into the fitting recess, the center of the arm part is brought closer to the center of the fitting recess, which facilitates the alignment when mounting the front locking member on one side wall part. The time required for mounting can be shortened.

  The gaming machine C12 according to any one of the gaming machines C2 to C11, characterized in that the wiring auxiliary member includes a positional deviation suppressing portion that suppresses positional deviation of the wiring along a longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes a positional deviation suppressing portion that suppresses positional deviation of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being rubbed against the wiring auxiliary member and being worn.

  Note that, as the positional deviation suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, a recess formed on the side surface facing the wiring is exemplified. In this case, for example, the pair of connecting rod portions are rotated in the direction in which the supporting portions open to each other, the distance between the end portions of the pair of connecting rod portions on the supporting portion side (the distance around the supporting portion in the circumferential direction) is reduced, and the supporting portion It is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member due to the extra length of the wiring that goes around. That is, the excess of the length of the wiring that goes around the support portion can be accommodated in the recess formed on the side surface facing the wiring and absorbed so that the wiring is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the positional deviation suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, a gap formed by the side surfaces facing each other of the pair of wall portions and in which the wiring is sandwiched has a curved shape or A portion formed in a bent shape is exemplified. For example, a case in which the gap in which the wiring is sandwiched is formed in an S shape, a rectangular wave shape, or a dogleg shape is exemplified.

  In this case, as compared with the case where the gap formed by the pair of wall portions is formed by a straight line, when the wiring moves in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions, the inner surface of the pair of wall portions and the wiring are Since the number of contact points can be increased, the resistance applied to the wiring can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring from moving in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions.

  Further, as the positional deviation suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the distance between the pair of wall portions is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring near the support portion. The part to be performed is illustrated. In this case, for example, when the wiring auxiliary member is rotated by the support portion, even if the wiring moves in the radial direction of the support portion, the distance between the pair of wall portions near the support portion is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring. Therefore, the wiring can be held between the pair of wall portions near the support portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the middle portion of the wiring auxiliary member.

  Further, as the positional deviation suppressing portion, for example, a portion protruding from the inner side surface of one wall portion when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions is exemplified. In this case, by hooking the projecting portion on the wiring, the resistance between the wiring and the connecting rod portion can be increased, and the wiring can be prevented from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion projects from the one side wall portion toward the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C13 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed of a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is provided from one side wall portion to the other side wall portion. Since the wires are formed to project toward the side wall portions, it is possible to form a portion where the wiring is caught on the inner side surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion.

  In the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppressing portion is continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portion and is alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C13, the positional deviation suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portions and are alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions, so only one side wall portion is provided. As compared with the case where the misregistration suppressing section is formed on the wiring, the wiring can be easily caught in the misregistration suppressing section.

  In the gaming machine C13 or C14, the gap between the positional deviation suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed to be smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is elastically deformed in a direction away from the other side wall portion. A gaming machine C15 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C13 or C14, the gap between the positional deviation suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is separated from the other side wall portion. When the wiring is inserted between the misalignment suppressing section and the other side wall section, the misalignment suppressing section elastically deforms, and the elastic recovery force causes the wiring to move to the side wall section. It can be sandwiched between the misalignment suppressing section. Thereby, the wiring can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines C12 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the positional deviation suppressing portion is provided near the supporting portions of the pair of side wall portions. A gaming machine C16 in which a game machine C16 is formed.

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C2 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction, and a supporting portion of the pair of side wall portions. A position shift suppressing portion is formed in the vicinity.

  In this case, the wiring arranged around the supporting portion is prevented from being displaced in the vicinity of the supporting portion, which is apt to be displaced particularly when the pair of connecting rods is rotated, so that the wiring is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress the displacement along the position.

  The misregistration suppressing portion may be formed by widening the formation interval of the pair of side wall portions near the supporting portion. The wiring can be curved at the portion where the formation interval of the pair of side wall portions is widened. Therefore, when the pair of connecting rods is rotated, the wiring is slackened in the vicinity of the supporting portion, and even if the wiring is about to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod, the wiring is curved by the positional deviation suppressing unit. This allows the wiring to absorb the slack in the vicinity of the supporting portion. This can prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pair of side wall portions and can suppress the abrasion of the wiring, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C16, of the pair of arm members supported by each other, the one arm member is extended toward the other arm member and is viewed in the axial direction of the support portion. A gaming machine C17, which is provided with an extending portion that overlaps with the other arm member, and the extending portion is formed so as to be able to contact the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine C17, the extending portion that extends from one arm member toward the other arm member overlaps the other arm member in the axial view of the support portion, and the other in the axial direction of the support portion. It is formed so as to be able to contact the arm member.

  In this case, when the one arm member is twisted in a direction to bring the extension portion closer to the other arm member, the extension portion and the other arm member come into contact with each other, and the deformation resistance of the one arm member increases.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C2 to C16, one arm member is deformed in a manner in which it is twisted in a direction in which the extended portion is brought closer to the other arm member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wirings arranged along the arm member from being twisted and deformed. Thereby, the durability of the wiring can be ensured.

<Example of technical idea for preventing displacement of a pair of arms of a member that rotates by a parallel link>
A base plate, a pair of arm members whose one end is pivotally supported by the base plate, and the other ends of the pair of arm members are parallel to the axial support direction of the one end. A movable member pivotally supported by a shaft and movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a driving force of the movable member. And a drive device that generates a parallel link formed by the pair of arm members, wherein one arm member of the pair of arm members is disposed on a side surface in the swing axis direction. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the bridging member is provided so that the bridging member can come into contact with a side surface of the other arm member of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a moving member that is movably formed by being swung by a parallel link (for example, see JP 2012-210238 A). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the pair of arm members forming the parallel link may be displaced in the swing axis direction during the rotation of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the bridging member fixed to the side surface of one arm member in the swing axis direction is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. . In this case, since the bridging member can prevent the movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction, the displacement of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine D1, the bridging member always has a side surface in the swing axis direction of the other arm member and the swing shaft thereof while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine D2, which is provided with overlapping portions that overlap each other when viewed in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, since the overlapping member is always formed with the overlapping portion, the other arm member can always come into contact with the bridging member, and thus the other arm member. It is possible to reliably prevent the positional deviation of the in the swing axis direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the drive device includes a transmission gear that transmits a driving force to the one arm member, and the one end portion of the one arm member has a swing shaft of the one end portion. Is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on the transmission swing axis and which has a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear, and is arranged to face the base member of the one arm member. The game machine D3 is characterized in that the side surface and the transmission gear are formed so as to come into contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the transmission gear is arranged between the one arm member and the base member, and the side surface of the one arm member facing the base member is disposed. Since it can be brought into contact with the transmission gear, it is possible to prevent one end portion of one arm member from being displaced (posture change) in the swing axis direction.

  The side surface of the one end of the one arm member facing the base member is brought into contact with the transmission gear, and the transmission gear is rotated, so that one end of the one arm member becomes the base member. The swing resistance of one of the arm members can be reduced as compared with the case of contact. Therefore, it is possible to both prevent the displacement of one arm member in the swing axis direction and reduce the swing resistance.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the one arm member is formed with an area smaller than the area of the one end of the one arm member, and is arranged between the one arm member and the base member. A gaming machine D4 characterized by comprising an area member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the contact area between the base member and one arm member is reduced by the small area member, so that one arm member swings. Resistance during movement is reduced. Thereby, the driving force of the driving device can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the small area member is formed in a shape having a longitudinal direction and a lateral direction that is shorter than the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is the one end portion of the one arm member. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to the one arm member in a posture along a direction connecting the other end portion.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the small area member has one arm in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is along the direction connecting one end of one arm member and the other end. Since the contact area between the small area member and the base member, which is fixed to the member and is along the direction connecting the one end portion and the other end portion of the one arm member, is increased, the other end portion of the one arm member is It is possible to improve the resistance force to the deformation in which one arm member bends by moving toward or away from the base member.

  Further, by making the small area member have a shape having a long side direction and a short side direction, the contact area between one arm member and the base member can be reduced as compared with the case where the small area member has a large diameter circle. You can

  In the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the small area member is an irregular shape including a body circle formed with the diameter in the lateral direction and a line drawn from the end in the longitudinal direction to the body circle. A straight line connecting the transmission swing shaft of the one arm member and the rotation shaft of the transmission gear always intersects the outer shape of the main body circle in the outer shape of the small area member. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the outer shape of the main body circular portion formed by the diameter of the small area member in the lateral direction causes the rotation of the transmission swing shaft and the transmission gear of one arm member. Since it always crosses the straight line connecting the shafts, even if the small area member and the transmission gear have the same inter-axis distance, the straight line connecting these axes extends from the longitudinal end of the small area member to the main body circle. Compared with the case of intersecting the drawn line, the contact area between the transmission gear and the side surface of the one arm member on the base member side can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the one arm member from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the passive gear portion is axially extended along a side surface opposite to the transmission gear among the side surfaces in the swinging axial direction, and the gear teeth of the passive gear portion are provided. The transmission gear is formed in a two-stage gear shape in which gears are stacked in two stages, and the first gear portion of the first stage is the one arm member and the base. And a second gear portion of a second stage formed between the member and the passive gear portion so that the second gear portion can be brought into contact with the umbrella portion in the rotation axis direction of the transmission gear. Characteristic game machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the transmission gear is formed of a two-stage gear, and the first gear portion of the two-stage gear is the base member of one arm member. Since the second gear portion can come into contact with the side surface on the side and the umbrella portion of the passive gear portion can come into contact therewith, it is possible to increase the number of contact points between the transmission gear and the one arm member. Thereby, the wobbling of one arm member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the first position is a projecting position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and the umbrella portion is the one arm member in the radial direction of the passive gear portion. The transmission gear is provided with a support portion extending beyond an inter-axis distance between the transmission swing shaft and the rotation shaft of the transmission member, the support portion including the transmission gear in a state in which the moving member is arranged at the projecting position. A gaming machine D8, which is formed so as to be capable of contacting the axial side surface of the second gear portion.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the supporting portion serves as the second gear portion of the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is arranged at the projecting position and is most likely to move in the swing axis direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to abut, the abutment can suppress the movement of one arm member in the swing axis direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported by the one arm member at two points, and a straight line connecting the supporting points is greater than 0 degree and 90 degrees from the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. A game machine D9 characterized by forming a smaller predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the bridging member is supported by one arm member at two points, and the straight line connecting the supporting points is the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. And a predetermined angle smaller than 90 degrees and smaller than 90 degrees, the load applied to one arm member by the contact between the other arm member and the bridging member is rotated about the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. It can be divided into a twisting direction, which is a direction, and a bending direction in which one arm member falls in the longitudinal direction. This can reduce the degree to which one arm member is deformed in one direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the bridging members are arranged in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and the pair of bridging members have substantially the same distance from the one arm member. Among the pair of bridging members, one bridging member, which is the side closer to the one end of the one arm member, is closer to the other end of the one arm member. A gaming machine D10, which is formed with a larger deformation resistance than the other bridging member on the side.

  According to the game machine D10, a pair of bridging members are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of one arm member, and one bridging member of the pair of bridging members is compared with the other bridging member. As a result, a large deformation resistance is formed. That is, one bridging member arranged on the side closer to the base member is more likely to be deformed than the other bridging member arranged on the side closer to the moving member.

  In the flexural deformation of the other arm member, the one end pivotally supported by the base member serves as an axis, and the other end pivotally supported by the moving member moves in the axial direction due to the weight of the moving member or the like. Caused by that. Therefore, in the case where the pair of bridging members are formed so that the distance from one of the arm members is substantially equal to each other, the other arm member and the other bridging member are compared to the one bridging member. Abut early.

  Here, when the deformation resistance of the other bridging member is as large as the deformation resistance of the one bridging member, there occurs a situation in which only the other bridging member receives the load from the other arm member by itself. The durability of the bridging member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the other bridging member has a smaller deformation resistance than the one bridging member, and the other arm member. Since one of the bridging members deforms before the other comes into contact with the one bridging member, the pair of bridging members can receive the load from the other arm member. Therefore, the load from the other arm member can be distributed to the pair of bridging members to bear the load, so that the durability of the pair of bridging members can be improved.

  As a method of reducing the deformation resistance of the other bridging member compared to the deformation resistance of one bridging member, the material of the other bridging member is made different from that of the other bridging member by changing the material. An example is a method of using a material having a lower rigidity. Further, when the materials are the same, a method of making the section modulus of the other bridging member smaller than that of the one bridging member, or a method of forming a reinforcing rib on the one bridging member Etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D10, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member and extending adjacent to the fixing portion. And a detent pin portion that comes into contact with the one arm member on the seat surface in the extending direction, and the one bridging member has the fixing portion the detent pin portion. The other bridging member is arranged closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion of the other bridging member. Gaming machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, the bridging member includes a fixing portion fixed to one arm member, and a detent pin portion that comes into contact with the one arm member at the seat surface.

  In one of the bridging members, the fixed portion is arranged farther from the other arm member than the detent pin portion (the detent pin portion is arranged between the fixed portion and the other arm member). . Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the one bridging member and the one bridging member turns over from the fixed portion as a starting point, the detent pin portion separates from the one arm member.

  On the other hand, in the other bridging member, the fixing portion is arranged closer to the other arm member than the rotation preventing pin portion (the fixing portion is arranged between the rotation preventing pin portion and the other arm member). Established). Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the other bridging member and the other bridging member turns around from the fixed portion as a starting point, the seat surface of the detent pin moves in the direction in which it is pressed against the one arm member. .

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, the seating surface of the rotation stopping pin portion is pressed against one arm member to increase the deformation resistance, so that compared to one bridging member. The other bridging member can be more difficult to turn over.

  Here, “turning up” means that the bridging member receives a force from the other arm member and peels off from the one arm member.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member. Compared with the embedding depth of the fixing part in the one arm member, the embedding depth of the other bridging member in the one arm member of the fixing part is deeper. Machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10 or D11, the bridging member includes a fixing portion fixed to one arm member, and the depth of embedding of the fixing portion in one arm member is Since the other bridging member is deeper than one bridging member, the other bridging member can be firmly fixed to one arm member as compared to one bridging member. As compared with the bridging member, the other bridging member can be more difficult to turn over.

  In any one of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridging member is a columnar portion that is inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion that is fixed to the one arm member, and after the fixing, The length by which the fixing portion of the one bridging member projects from the side surface of the one arm member, as compared with the length by which the fixing portion of the other bridging member projects from the side surface. A gaming machine D13 characterized by a shorter length.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D10 to D12, the bridging member includes the fixing portion, and after the fixing portion is fixed to one arm member, the fixing portion is Since the length of the bridging member protruding from the arm member is shorter in the other bridging member than in the one bridging member, one arm member of the other bridging member can be compared to the one bridging member. The deformation resistance can be increased. Therefore, compared with one bridging member, the other bridging member can be more difficult to turn over.

  In any of the gaming machines D10 to D13, the other in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member in comparison with the section modulus of the one bridging member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member The gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the cross-section coefficient of the bridging member is formed larger.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D10 to D13, in comparison with the cross-sectional coefficient of one bridging member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member, the other arm member Since the cross-section modulus of the other bridging member in the direction of the applied load is formed to be larger, the deformation resistance of one bridging member may be affected by the difference in shape between one bridging member and the other bridging member. In comparison, the deformation resistance of the other bridging member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, the bridging member includes a projecting portion projecting from a side surface of the gaming machine D1 which is in contact with the other arm member, and the projecting portion is configured such that the moving member is the first one. When it is arranged at one position, it can contact the other arm member, and when it is arranged at the second position, it cannot contact the other arm member. A gaming machine D15 characterized by the above.

  According to the game machine D15, the projecting portion is projected from the bridging member. The protruding portion is capable of contacting the other arm member when the moving member is arranged at the first position, and abuts the other arm member when the moving member is arranged at the second position. Impossible.

  Thereby, according to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D14, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the distance between the bridging member and the other arm member is increased. The protruding portion can be narrowed, and the other arm member and the bridging member can be brought into contact with each other from the inside of which the deformation of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is small. On the other hand, when the moving member is arranged at the second position, it is possible to secure a large distance between the bridging member and the other arm member and increase the resistance when moving the moving member from the second position. Can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the moving amount of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is large, while when the moving member is arranged at the second position. Is effective when the movement amount of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is small enough to be ignored. That is, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, a load is applied from the moving member in a direction in which the other arm member is bent along the longitudinal direction, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. This is effective when a load is applied from the moving member in the direction in which the other arm member is twisted along the lateral direction.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member is larger than the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member. A gaming machine D16, which is characterized by being formed thinner.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, in comparison with the width of the bridging member in the portion overlapping with the side surface of one arm member, the portion overlapping with the side surface of the other arm member. Since the width of the bridging member is narrower, the one arm member and the other arm member are connected in series when the other arm member and the bridging member contact and the bridging member deforms. It is possible to prevent the bridging member from twisting about the direction in which the bridging member moves.

  That is, the deformation of the bridging member can be easily limited to the bending deformation along the direction in which the one arm member and the other arm member are continuously provided. Therefore, for example, when forming a portion for improving the deformation resistance against bending and twisting of the bridging member, its arrangement can be limited to a location where the bending deformation resistance of the bridging member is increased. The structure of the member can be simplified.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D16, the moving member is supported above the base member when the moving member is arranged at at least one of the first position and the second position, and the center of gravity of the moving member Is formed at a position closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and at a position separated from the other arm member on the bridging member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. A gaming machine D17 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine D17, the center of gravity of the moving member is closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and the other arm member is located on the bridging member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. Is formed at a position separated from. Therefore, when the moving member is supported above the base member, the weight of the moving member is applied to the other arm member more than to the one arm member. In this case, it is possible to make the other arm member more flexible than the one arm member.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D16, when the pair of arm members bends due to the weight of the moving member, the other arm member is brought into contact with the bridging member. It is possible to make it easier, and it is possible to suppress the displacement of the pair of arm members due to the bending of one arm member toward the bridging member side as compared with the other arm member.

<An example of a technical idea of irradiating light from the outside of the game area toward the inner part of the game area>
A gaming machine comprising: a rail member that forms an outer frame of a game area; and an irradiation device that is disposed outside the rail member and that irradiates light to the inside of the rail member. The game machine E1 is characterized in that light emitted from the light travels on the back side of the rail member.

  There is a gaming machine provided with an irradiation device arranged inside the game area in front view and irradiating light from the back side of the game area, and performing an effect by the irradiation device (for example, see JP2012-081031A). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a cover member for blindfolding is arranged in front of the irradiation device in order to prevent the irradiation device such as an LED from being visible in the front of the game area in a bare state. However, since it is necessary to paint the board surface, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, an irradiation device that irradiates light to the inside of the game area through the back side of the rail member that forms the outer frame of the game area is arranged outside the rail member, Since it is possible to prevent the irradiation device such as the LED from being exposed and visible inside the game area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area.

  By disposing the irradiation device arranged outside the game area on the back side of the plate member such as the outer edge member, the irradiation device can be made invisible from the front side.

  In the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is emitted toward the special winning opening in which the ball wins, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side on the outer edge of the special winning opening. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that a direction changing portion for changing the direction to face is formed.

  Here, when the irradiation device is arranged outside the rail member, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front side in order to direct the irradiated light to the player side. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front side. Therefore, a changing member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiating device and changes the traveling direction toward the front side is required, and the changing member is arranged inside the game area. In this case, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolds on the front surface of the changing member or to paint the board surface in order to prevent the changing member from being visible when exposed in front view. There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is emitted toward the special winning opening, and the outer edge of the special winning opening is emitted from the irradiation device. A direction change part that changes the direction of light to the front side is formed, but the outer edge of the big winning opening is the part that the player aims to win the ball, and it can be seen in front view. Since it is a possible portion, it is possible to eliminate the need for a cover member for blindfolds, etc., and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area.

  As a mode in which the direction change portion is formed on the outer edge of the special winning opening, the wall surface of the opening of the special winning opening is formed to be inclined at an angle at which the light emitted from the irradiation device can be reflected toward the front side. And a mode in which the upper lid member for opening and closing the special winning opening is formed so as to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side.

  In the gaming machine E2, it is possible to form a closed state in which the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening is closed and an open state in which the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening is opened, and the outer edge of the special winning opening is formed. An upper lid member to be formed, the upper lid member includes the direction changing portion, and the upper lid member forms the closed state or the open state in either state, A gaming machine E3, characterized in that light emitted from the irradiation device arrives.

  Here, it is difficult to dispose an irradiation device such as an LED on the upper lid member arranged at the special winning opening because the upper lid member becomes large. Therefore, it is difficult to make the upper lid member emit light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the direction changing portion that directs the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device to the front side is in the closed state and the opened state of the special winning opening. Since it is formed on the upper lid member that forms the outer edge of the special winning opening, it can be seen by the player as if the direction change portion of the upper lid member is emitting light, and the upper lid member is prevented from increasing in size. However, it is possible to improve the ability of the upper lid member as a performance part.

  Also, since the state of the upper lid member is changed, whether or not light reaches the direction changing portion is changed, so it is confirmed whether or not the direction changing portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if it is emitting light. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether the special winning opening is open or closed. This makes it easy to check the state of the special winning opening.

  Incidentally, as a mode in which whether or not the light reaches the direction changing part by changing the state of the upper lid member is changed, a mode in which a member capable of shielding the light before reaching the direction changing part is arranged, A mode in which the output of the irradiation device is turned on / off in accordance with the switching of the state of the upper lid member is exemplified.

  Examples of the manner of forming the upper lid member include a manner of sliding in and out in the front-rear direction of the game area, and a manner of a pair of opposed long plate members swinging about an axis parallel to the front-rear direction.

  In the gaming machine E3, a shielding portion is formed so as to shield the light emitted from the irradiation device, and when the special winning opening forms one of the open state and the closed state, the irradiation device emits light. While the light reaches the direction changing portion, when the special winning opening forms the other of the open state and the closed state, the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction changing portion is shielded by the shielding portion. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the shielding portion is formed in a manner capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiation device, and depending on whether the special winning opening is closed or open. , Whether the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction changing part reaches the direction changing part, or whether the light does not reach the direction changing part due to the provision of the shielding part between the irradiation device and the direction changing part. Changes, it is possible to change the state in which the direction change portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if it is emitting light only by the operation required for the upper lid member to continue the game. Therefore, the upper lid member can be used both for the role of controlling the passage of the ball to the special winning opening and for the role of performing the effect by the light emitted from the irradiation device.

  Examples of the shielding portion include a metal rail member that divides the game area, a painted portion that is painted on the board surface of the game board, and a decorative plate that is formed by projecting from the board surface of the game board to the front side. That is, when the shield portion is formed of a rail member, the rail member serves both the purpose of forming the outer frame of the game area and the purpose of the shield portion.

  In the gaming machine E3 or E4, a front plate member that is disposed on the front side of the special winning opening and that reaches the direction changing portion and that has light whose traveling direction has changed is provided, and the front plate member is the A gaming machine E5, which is formed so as to cover the special winning opening in a front view, and wherein the direction changing portion focuses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.

  Here, there is a gaming machine in which a front plate member is arranged on the front side of the special winning opening and the front plate member covers the special winning opening in a front view. In such a gaming machine, the inside of the special winning opening can be suppressed from being visually recognized, and the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the special winning opening can be improved. On the other hand, in this case, since the light emitted from the irradiation device to the special winning opening is visually recognized through the front plate member, it is necessary to increase the intensity of the light in order to maintain the effect of the light emitted from the irradiation device. However, there is a problem that the usable irradiation device is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of the light toward the front plate member collects the light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member. Since the light is emitted, the intensity of light reaching a predetermined portion of the front plate member can be increased without changing the irradiation device.

  In addition, as a mode of condensing light, a direction changing portion is formed in a dogleg shape and the side facing the front plate member is opened, or a direction changing portion is formed in a parabola shape and the side facing the front plate member is opened. The aspect etc. which are performed are illustrated.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the light emitted from the irradiation device when the special winning opening forms the open state reaches the direction changing portion, and the ball winning the big winning opening is A game machine E6, characterized in that the light emitted from the irradiation device is prevented from reaching the direction changing portion by crossing the light emitted from the irradiation device.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, when the special winning opening is opened, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the big winning opening is achieved. The light that is emitted from the irradiation device is blocked from reaching the direction change portion by the ball that has won the prize crossing the light emitted from the irradiation device, so whether the direction change portion is visually recognized as bright or dark. , It is possible to confirm that the ball has won the big winning opening. With this, for example, even when the special winning opening is invisible when viewed from the front, it is possible to confirm that the sphere has been won in the big winning opening by visually recognizing the light emitted from the irradiation device. Since it is not necessary to look into the winning opening from diagonally above, the burden on the player can be alleviated.

  Here, for example, when the irradiation direction of the light faces the downflow direction of the sphere, the light is blocked by the first sphere regardless of whether one sphere wins the big winning opening or when a plurality of spheres win. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the number of winning balls by light.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, since the sphere traverses the light emitted from the irradiation device, the case where the sphere and the light face each other or the light is emitted Unlike the case of flowing down along the irradiation direction of, the light emitted from the irradiation device is blocked for each sphere that has won the special winning opening. With this, even when the balls continuously enter the special winning opening, the light can be shielded for each sphere, and the number of spheres winning the special winning opening can be determined by the light.

  In addition, since the sphere crosses the light, the sphere that has won the special winning opening is better than when the downflow direction of the sphere and the traveling direction of the light face each other or when the sphere flows down along the irradiation direction of the light. Since it is possible to shorten the period of blocking the light and lengthen the period in which the direction changing portion is visually recognized brightly, it is possible to ensure the performance of the direction changing portion.

  In the gaming machine E6, a front plate member is provided which is disposed on the front side of the special winning opening and which reaches the direction changing portion and the light whose traveling direction is changed reaches, and the direction changing portion is the front plate. A gaming machine E7 characterized in that light is focused on a predetermined portion of the member, the irradiation device is formed in a manner of irradiating light from a plurality of locations, and a sphere individually traverses the light emitted from each location. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the gaming machine E7 includes a front plate member that is disposed on the front side of the special winning opening and that reaches the direction changing portion and the light whose traveling direction has changed reaches. Since the direction changing portion focuses light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member, for example, when light of a plurality of colors is emitted from the irradiation device, the light of the color actually emitted and the light of each color are combined. The light of the selected color can be visually recognized through the front plate member.

  Further, the irradiation device is formed in such a manner as to irradiate light from a plurality of points, and since the sphere individually traverses the light radiated from each point, the light radiated to the front plate member at the timing when the sphere flows down. The aspect of can be changed.

  For example, let us consider a case where the irradiation device includes a pair of points for irradiating light, and one side irradiates with “blue” color light and the other side irradiates with “red” color light. In this case, the light condensed on the front plate member can be visually recognized as “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red”.

  Here, if a sphere flows down in a manner that it crosses the light emitted from one location and blocks the light, the "blue" color light is blocked, so the front plate member has a "red" color. Only the light of is visible.

  On the other hand, if the sphere flows down in a manner that it crosses the light emitted from the other place and the light is blocked, the "red" color light will be blocked, so the front plate member will have the "blue" color. Only light is visible.

  In this way, the mode of light visually recognized by the front plate member can be changed depending on from which part the light emitted from the sphere is shielded. This change of the light state is caused by the sphere flowing down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change of the light state can be generated at random timing. That is, as compared with the case where a change in the form of the light emitted from the irradiation device is generated by electronic control, a more random effect can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E2 to E7, the special winning opening is arranged below the center of the game area, and a lower edge of the rail member forms an opening lower side of the special winning opening. Machine E8.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a special winning opening is arranged below a liquid crystal display device (for example, see JP 2012-210238 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the out port is formed at the lower edge of the game area, and the liquid crystal display device is formed above the large winning port arranged above the large winning port. However, there is a problem in that the driving device prevents the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device from being lowered and prevents the liquid crystal display device from becoming large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, the lower edge of the rail member forms the lower side of the opening of the special winning opening. In this case, by forming the opening with the lowest point of the rail member as a reference, it is possible to form the left and right ends of the opening by protruding downward from the game area, as compared to the case where the lower side of the opening is formed by a straight line, The special winning opening can be formed in a small space.

  Further, since the special winning opening is arranged in a region including the lower edge of the rail member, which is a place where the outlet is generally arranged, the position of the drive device formed on the back surface of the special winning opening is lowered. The lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered.

  In the gaming machine E8, a first outlet that is arranged on one side in the left-right direction of the special winning opening and discharges the ball to the outside of the game area, and a ball that is arranged on the other side of the large winning opening in the left-right direction is used for the game. The second outlet opening for discharging to the outside of the area, the closed state which is disposed above the special winning opening and closes the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening, and the flow path of the ball to the special winning opening. An upper lid member capable of forming an open state in which the upper lid member is opened, and upper sides of the first and second out ports are formed above an upper side surface of an end portion of the upper lid member, and Since the lower sides of the outlet and the second outlet are formed below the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, the first out along the upper side surface of the upper lid member in the closed state of the special winning opening. That the ball can flow down to the mouth or the second outlet. Game machine E9 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E8, the upper sides of the first out opening and the second out opening are formed above the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, and the first out opening and the second out opening are formed. Since the lower side of the out port is formed below the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, the upper lid member can be ejected from the first out port or the second out port while the upper lid member is being ejected. And, it can be lowered to the same position as the second outlet.

  In the gaming machine E9, an upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed in a shape inclined downward in both left and right directions.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9, the upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed to be inclined downward in both left and right directions, so that the vertical width of the left and right ends of the special winning opening can be suppressed. it can. As a result, the nails formed in the game area and flowing down the balls toward the special winning opening can be moved in parallel downward, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the upper lid member is formed with a plurality of ribs protrudingly provided on a lower surface thereof.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, the ribs are formed on the lower side surface of the upper lid member to increase the rigidity of the upper lid member and prevent the upper lid member from falling down due to the weight of the ball. can do.

  In the gaming machine E11, among the plurality of ribs, the rib formed inside the special winning opening is formed on the back side of the game area in a state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. A gaming machine E12 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E11, the rib formed inside the special winning opening is formed on the back side of the gaming area in the state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. It is possible to secure a sufficient vertical width in which the balls are flown under the upper lid member and the balls are arranged on the front side of the special winning opening. That is, it is possible to prevent the rib and the sphere from interfering with each other.

  In any of the gaming machines E9 to E12, before the ball flowing down toward the first out port or the second out port reaches the first out port or the second out port, the direction of the ball is changed to the first direction. A gaming machine E13 provided with a ball orientation adjusting portion that faces the opening direction of the 1-out opening or the second-out opening.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E9 to E12, the direction of the ball can be directed toward the opening direction of the first out opening or the second out opening by the ball orientation adjusting unit. It can be easily discharged to the first out port or the second out port. As a result, the opening width of the first out opening or the second out opening can be suppressed, and therefore, when the special winning opening, the first out opening, and the second out opening are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, their placement positions can be changed. Can be lowered below the game area.

  In the gaming machine E1, a direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device to the direction toward the front side is provided, and the board surface forming the back surface of the game area is formed of transparent resin, and the direction change is performed. The game machine E14, wherein the portion is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface.

  Here, when the irradiation device is arranged outside the rail member, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front side in order to direct the irradiated light to the player side. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it is difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device to the front side. Therefore, a changing member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiating device and changes the traveling direction toward the front side is required, and the changing member is arranged inside the game area. In this case, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolds on the front surface of the changing member or to paint the board surface in order to prevent the changing member from being visible when exposed in front view. There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the board surface forming the back surface of the game area is made of transparent resin, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side. Since the direction change part that changes to the direction is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface, even when the direction change part is visible in front view, it is not noticeable and it affects the decoration of the game area Can be made smaller. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, as the aspect in which the direction changing portion is formed on the board surface, the aspect in which the board surface is cut, the aspect in which the board surface is drilled, the aspect in which the nail is screwed into the board surface, and the direction change portion in the resin mold of the board surface The method of forming a recess in a molded product by forming a protrusion corresponding to

  In the gaming machine E14, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the light whose traveling direction is changed by the direction changing portion, is emitted from below to a member protruding from the board surface. Amusement machine E15.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E13, the light emitted from the irradiation device, the light whose traveling direction is changed by the direction changing portion, is applied to the member protruding from the board surface from below. Since the light is irradiated, the shadow formed below the member protruding from the board can be made brighter by the light emitted from the irradiation device by the illumination of the hole. As a result, the performance of the area below the member protruding from the board surface can be improved, and the ball can be easily seen when the ball passes through the area below the member protruding from the board surface. Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the burden felt by the player by making the ball difficult to see.

  The members protruding from the board surface include nails, windmills, through gates, and the like.

<Points for adjusting whether or not to contact the rib during movement of the wing member>
A base member, a first moving unit supported by the base member and reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position, and a second moving unit supported by at least the first moving unit. Means and driving means for driving the first moving means, and a first state in which the second moving means relatively moves in the first direction with respect to the first moving means and a first state thereof are compared. Then, in the gaming machine forming the second state in which the resistance at the time of relative movement between the first moving means and the second moving means increases, the switching between the first state and the second state is A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the second moving means receives a load from at least the first moving means and moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first moving means and a second moving means supported by the first moving means so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first moving means, and the second moving means thereof. There is a gaming machine provided with a second drive motor for driving the second moving means in order to change the operating resistance in the relative movement with respect to the first moving means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-147471). According to this gaming machine, for example, when it is desired to reduce the operating resistance of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means, the power transmission of the second drive motor is canceled to reduce the resistance, and when the operating resistance is increased. In addition, the posture of the second moving means can be fixed by utilizing the power transmission of the second drive motor. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the weight of the first moving means for disposing the second drive motor becomes heavier by the weight of the second drive motor. In this case, the first drive motor that drives the first moving means may be upsized, and the degree of freedom in arranging the first drive motor may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the switching between the first state and the second state in which the resistance of the second moving means at the time of relative movement with respect to the first moving means is different, and the second moving means moves at least the first movement. Since it is carried out by receiving a load from the means and moving, it is not necessary to provide another drive device for changing the resistance of the second moving means at the time of relative movement, so that the weight of the second moving means can be reduced. .

  The mode in which the second moving means moves relative to the first moving means is not particularly limited. For example, relative movement in a direction along the moving direction of the first moving means may be used, or relative movement in a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the first moving means may be used. Further, the movement may be along a straight line or may be along a curved line.

  In the gaming machine F1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is switched by the first moving means passing through a third position which is a position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is such that the first moving means moves the third position, which is a position between the first position and the second position. Since the switching is performed by passing, the timing of switching the state during the movement of the first moving unit can be suppressed from being displaced as compared with the case where the operating resistance of the second moving unit is changed by another driving force.

  Further, since the change of the state is caused by the first moving means passing through the third position, it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state regardless of the speed of the first moving means. Therefore, the effect of switching between the first state and the second state can be performed without being limited to the operation speed of the first moving unit.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a first base that supports the first moving means and a second base that supports the second moving means, and the first moving means includes the second base. In the second state, the second moving means abuts on the abutting means, and the second base has the aforesaid first moving means. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the second moving means is supported on the side opposite to the abutting means with reference to the point of supporting the second moving means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first state and the second state are changed depending on whether or not the second moving means contacts the contact means of the first moving means. Whether or not the contact state is maintained can be changed by the second moving means receiving a tensile load from the second base. Therefore, the second moving means can be separated from the first moving means. The driving force can be taken over by the second base, and the load on the driving device can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a mode of displacement of the second moving means, a mode of displacement in which the second moving means changes its posture with respect to the first moving means, and a mode of displacement in which the second moving means moves in parallel to the first moving means. Aspects are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine F3, the second moving means is configured to move along the depth direction in the player viewpoint in the change between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the second moving means moves along the depth direction in the player's viewpoint in the change between the first state and the second state. Compared with the case of changing along orthogonal directions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the change, and to prevent a sense of incongruity from being produced by the first moving means and the second moving means when the state is switched. can do.

  The mode of movement of the second moving means along the depth direction from the player's viewpoint is not particularly limited. For example, a tilting motion centered on a support point with the base member may be used, or a parallel movement in the depth direction may be used.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the contact means is compared with a portion arranged on the opposite side of the second base from the point where the second movement means is supported by the first movement means in the second state. In the first state, a portion of the second moving means, which is located on the opposite side of the second base from the point where the second moving means is supported by the first moving means, is higher than the first moving means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, by changing the protruding height of the abutting means, the first state is more movable in the first state than in the second state. It is possible to make it difficult for the contact means and the contact means to contact each other. Accordingly, it is possible to cause the change between the first state and the second state while maintaining the distance between the first moving means and the second moving means. Compared to the case where the interval between the two changes, it is more difficult for the player to grasp the change, and it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being brought about by the first moving means and the second moving means when the state is switched. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the first moving means has a portion arranged on the opposite side of the second base of a point supporting the second moving means to a side close to the second moving means. A gaming machine F6, characterized in that it is configured in a projecting manner.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, a portion of the first moving means that faces the second moving means and abuts on the second moving means side in advance. When the second moving means is brought into contact with the first moving means by tilting due to gravity, it is possible to make the second moving means and the first moving means come into contact with each other easily by the overhang. The power can be increased.

  As a result, the range of the position of the center of gravity of the second moving unit that can secure the frictional resistance between the second moving unit and the first moving unit can be widened as compared with the case where the first moving unit does not project. That is, it is possible to easily secure the frictional resistance even when the shift width of the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means from the support point of the second moving means in the first moving means is small. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the second base includes a support base fixed to the game machine, and a displacement means that is displaceably supported by the support base and supports the second moving means. A gaming machine F7, characterized in that the displacing means reaches an end of a displaceable area while the first moving means is moving in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, while the first moving means is moving in the first direction, the displacement means is located at the end of the displaceable area of the support base. Since it arrives, it is possible to easily apply a load from the displacement means of the second base to the second movement means during the movement of the first movement means.

<Changing the position of the center of gravity switches the posture of the second moving means to easy movement>
A base member, a first moving unit supported by the base member and reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position, and a second moving unit supported by at least the first moving unit. Means, and a drive means for operating the first moving means, the second moving means comprises a pivotal support means, which is displaceably supported by the first moving means via the pivotal support means. A first state in which the second moving means moves between a first posture with respect to the first moving means and a second posture in which the shaft supporting means is tilted with respect to the first posture relative to the first posture; A second state in which the second moving means stops in the second posture, the first state and the second state are switched during the movement of the first moving means, and gravity is generated in the second state. , Acting to maintain said second moving means in a second position In the first state, the horizontal distance between the shaft support means and the center of gravity of the second moving means is less than or equal to the horizontal distance between the shaft support means and the center of gravity of the second moving means in the second state. The change in the horizontal distance between the shaft supporting means and the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means is caused by the displacement of the second moving means at least from the first moving means. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a second moving means is provided in the first moving means, only the first moving means operates and the second moving means does not operate, and the first moving means. There is a game machine that is formed by switching between the first state in which both the second moving means operate (see, for example, JP 2011-147471 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the second moving means is left unloaded, the second moving means operates due to the momentum of the operation of the first moving means, which makes it difficult to form the second state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is necessary to mount a switching means for switching whether or not the relative movement of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means on the first moving means. In this case, the driving force for operating the first moving means needs to be increased by the weight of the switching means, or when the switching means operates by electricity, the wiring for supplying electricity to the switching means becomes complicated. There was a problem that it became.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the second state in which the second moving means is stopped in the second posture, the gravity of the second moving means works to maintain the second moving means in the second posture, while In the first state in which the second moving means is moved between the second posture and the first posture, the center of gravity of the second moving means and the pivotal support means are closer to each other in the horizontal direction than in the second state. As a result, how the load is applied to the second moving means by gravity changes. Therefore, the ease of the relative movement of the second moving means with respect to the first moving means can be changed, so that it is not necessary to place the switching means on the first moving means, and the first moving means and the second moving means can be changed. The total weight of and can be reduced. As a result, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced and the driving means can be downsized.

  In particular, as compared with the first posture, in the second posture which is the tilted posture, the horizontal distance of the center of gravity position of the second moving means from the pivot support means is increased, so that the gravity moves the second moving means. Since the action of pushing back to the second posture is increased, the action of maintaining the second moving means in the second posture can be secured.

  Further, the movement of the center of gravity of the second moving means with reference to the shaft support means occurs when the second moving means is displaced by receiving a load from at least the first moving means. Therefore, when the switching means is operated electrically. As described above, it is not necessary to supply electricity to the first moving means, and the electric wiring can be simplified.

  Here, the change between the first state and the second state can also be caused by, for example, causing attraction by magnetic force between the first moving unit and the second moving unit. However, in this case, there is a possibility that the second moving means may largely shake due to a reaction when the attraction due to the magnetic force is peeled off, or the second moving means may operate at a high speed, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, when the state is switched by changing the position of the center of gravity, the second moving means does not react when the state changes, and there is no fear that the second moving means operates at a high speed. It can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is changed by the first moving means passing through the third position arranged between the first position and the second position. Characteristic gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the relative movements of the first moving means and the second moving means can be matched based on the position change of the first moving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timings of the state changes of the first moving means and the second moving means from deviating from each other, and thus it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort in the effect produced by the first moving member and the second moving member. it can.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the aspect of the load received by the second moving means is such that the first moving means moves the third position which is a position between the first position and the second position. Since the switching is performed by passing, it is possible to suppress deviation of the timing of switching the state during the movement of the first moving unit, as compared with the case where the mode of the load received by the second moving unit is changed by another driving force. Further, since the change in the state occurs when the first moving unit passes through the third position, the load mode can be switched regardless of the speed of the first moving unit.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the base member includes a first base that supports the first moving means and a second base that supports the second moving means, and the second moving means has one end. The part is rotatably supported by the first moving means, and the other end is rotatably supported by the second base, and is hung on the second base in the first state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, in the first state, the other end of the second moving means is hung, so that some percentage of the weight of the second moving means is applied to the base member. Since it can be applied, the driving force for driving the first moving means and the second moving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the support portion for the first moving means of the second moving means is relatively displaced downward with respect to the first moving means when the first moving means is started to rise. A gaming machine G4.

  If the weight of the second moving means at the center of gravity is increased, the load on the driving means for driving the first moving means is increased when the first moving means is moved up together with the second moving means, and the second moving means is moved at high speed. Will be difficult. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving means cannot be increased, the desired operation speed of the first moving means limits the weight of the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the support portion of the second moving means and the first moving means has the first moving means when the first moving means is started to rise. Since it is relatively displaced downward with respect to the first moving means, it is possible to reduce the weight of the second moving means applied to the first moving means when the first moving means is started to rise.

  Note that, for example, when the attraction due to the magnetic force occurs between the first moving means and the second moving means, resistance due to the attracting force occurs regardless of the operation direction of the second moving means. Since only resistance is generated in the direction, the second moving means is displaced downward relative to the first moving means, so that the load applied from the second moving means to the first moving means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the shaft support means is supported by a guide portion that has a component directed in the horizontal direction and extends downward, and with the upward movement of the first moving means, The gaming machine G5, wherein the shaft support means operates in a manner of moving the guide portion downward.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the raising operation of the first moving means is used while suppressing the raising operation speed of the shaft support means based on the raising operation of the first moving means. Since the second moving means can be moved in a direction different from the moving direction of the first moving means by displacing the shaft supporting means of the second moving means in the left-right direction, it is as if the first moving means and the first moving means move. The two moving means can be made to appear as if they are operated by another drive device, and the effect of production can be improved while reducing the number of drive devices provided.

  It should be noted that the manner in which the component has a component directed in the horizontal direction and extends downward is not limited at all. For example, it may be extended along a direction in which it descends on a straight line, or may be extended stepwise.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, based on the ascending operation of the first moving means, the shaft support means includes a region that moves with a lateral velocity component having a magnitude similar to the ascending speed of the first moving means. A gaming machine G6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4 or G5, based on the ascending operation of the first moving means, the shaft support means causes the left-right speed to be the same as the ascending speed of the first moving means. Since the area that moves by the component is included, it is possible to change the center of gravity position of the second moving means while performing the effect of moving at a constant speed in the two directions of the up-down direction and the left-right direction by the first moving means and the second moving means. You can

  In the gaming machine G5, the guiding portion includes a region extending along the horizontal direction, the gaming machine G7.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, since the guide portion includes a region extending along the horizontal direction, the support means with respect to the vertical movement distance of the first moving means in the region. It is possible to secure a large horizontal moving distance and to increase the moving speed of the center of gravity in the left and right directions. This makes it possible to lengthen the period in which the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means is maintained at the first position side or the second position side with reference to the supporting means, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the second moving means by gravity is maintained for a long period of time. Can be kept.

  In the gaming machine G5, the gaming machine G8, wherein the inclination angle of the guide portion includes a region perpendicular to the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5, the inclination angle of the guide portion includes a region that is at a right angle to the horizontal direction. Therefore, when the first moving means is moved up and down, the second It is possible to form a region where the own weight of the moving means does not become a load for the vertical movement of the first moving means. Thereby, the operation resistance of the first moving unit can be reduced, and the operation of the first moving unit can be smoothed.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G8, the second base includes a support pedestal fixed to the gaming machine, and a displacement means movably supported by the support pedestal and supporting the second moving means. A gaming machine G9, characterized in that the displacing means reaches an end of a displaceable area while the first moving means is moving.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G8, the displacement means reaches the end of the displaceable area of the support base while the first movement means is moving. It is possible to easily apply a load from the displacement means of the second base to the second movement means while the first movement means is moving.

<Invention of matching the speed change between rotation and slide of the slider crank conversion mechanism>
While being supported by a rotating means that rotates about a rotating shaft, a driving means that drives the rotating means, and a first means that is disposed on the rotating means and is separated from the rotating shaft, the rotating means is In a gaming machine provided with a slide means that slides along a first moving line having a component orthogonal to the rotation axis based on rotation, a rate of change in the operation speed of the slide means when viewed in the rotation axis direction. And a gaming machine H1 provided with a reduction means for reducing a deviation from a change rate of the rotation speed of the rotation means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that performs a rotating operation of a rotating means and a sliding operation of a reciprocating sliding means by a single driving means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-030671). reference). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the slide means is operated by the slider crank mechanism, and a speed change rate of the rotation operation of the rotation means and a speed change rate of the slide operation of the slide means are deviated. For example, even when the rotating means is rotating at a constant speed, the connecting portion of the sliding means is compared to the case where the connecting portion of the rotating means and the sliding means moves along the sliding movement direction of the sliding means. When moving along the direction perpendicular to the slide operation direction, the change in the operation speed of the slide means becomes smaller. In this case, it is difficult to produce the effect of matching the speed change of the rotating means and the speed change of the sliding means, and in order to match the speed change, it is necessary to drive the rotating means and the sliding means by separate drive motors. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the reducing means reduces the deviation between the change rate of the rotation speed of the rotating means and the change rate of the operating speed of the slide means in the rotation axis direction. A single drive motor can be used to produce an effect in which the rotation speed and the operation speed of the slide means operate at the same change rate.

  As the reducing means, a supporting hole for accommodating the supporting means is formed in the sliding means, and the supporting hole has a wide width at both ends in the extending direction and a narrow width at the central portion in the extending direction. And a case where the support hole is formed in an elliptical shape whose central portion is wider than both ends in the extending direction.

  In the gaming machine H1, a game machine H2 characterized in that, when the rotating means rotates at a constant speed, the reducing means configures the sliding means to perform a uniform speed sliding operation.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, when the rotating means is rotated at a constant speed by the reducing means, the sliding means is also configured to slide at a constant speed. It is possible to easily recognize the effect produced by the operation and the effect produced by the sliding operation of the slide means as one body, and it is possible to provide an effective effect.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the reducing means includes second means fixed to the sliding means and abuttable to the first means of the rotating means, and the second means includes the first means. The side surface on the side abutting the means becomes deeper in depth and the rate of change in the depth of recess becomes smaller as the side surface approaches the rotation axis of the rotating means along the direction orthogonal to the first movement line. A gaming machine H3, which is provided with a portion formed of a recessed shape.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second means formed on the slide means has a deeper recess depth as it approaches the rotation axis, and the rate of change of the recess depth is increased. By providing the portion formed of the recessed shape of the smaller size, it is possible to absorb the change in the operation speed of the first means in the slide operation direction of the slide operation means, and to realize the change mode of the slide operation speed of the slide means. , It is possible to approach the mode of changing the rotation speed of the rotating means.

  That is, by setting the change rate of the recessed depth in this way, for example, when the rotating means is rotating at a constant speed, the operating speed along the first movement line of the first means becomes high. The operation speed of the slide means is greatly reduced at a position (far from the rotation axis), and the operation speed of the slide means is decreased at a position where the operation speed along the first movement line of the first means is small (a location near the rotation axis). The degree of decrease of can be reduced.

  Further, by forming the second means integrated with the slide means in this way, a separate member for adjusting the operation speed of the slide operation means can be eliminated, and the member cost can be reduced. Further, the space for disposing the members can be suppressed.

  The second means may contact the first means from one direction of the sliding movement of the sliding means, and may be configured as, for example, a wall portion, or the first means can be contacted with the sliding movement of the sliding means in both directions. It may be in contact with each other, and may be configured as a hole, for example.

  Further, the form of the recess of the second means is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a curved surface, or may be formed of a shape in which two flat surfaces are connected to each other at a portion having the deepest recess depth to form a valley.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second means is configured in such a manner that the second means comes into contact with the first means in a limited direction from one direction of the sliding movement of the sliding means, and the second means is constituted.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, the second means is configured to abut the first means in a limited direction from one direction of the sliding movement of the sliding means, so that the rotation of the second means. The first operation state in which the slide means follows the rotation speed of the second means and the second operation in which the slide means cannot follow the rotation speed of the second means and the movement width of the slide means becomes small depending on the speed of the operation. It is possible to configure two operating states, that is, a state.

  In the gaming machine H4, regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating means, by continuously rotating the rotating means, the aspect in which the sliding means moves up and down is the same, the gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, by continuously rotating the rotating means, the vertical movement mode of the sliding means can be made the same regardless of the rotation direction thereof. By switching the rotating direction of the rotating means, it is possible to change the range in which the first means starts contacting the second means while maintaining the operation of the sliding means.

  That is, for example, in the case of rotating the rotating means in the forward direction, the first range of the first means is brought into contact with the second means at the start of contact with the second means, while in the case of rotating the rotating means in the reverse direction, the second range is brought into contact with the second means. Since the second range different from the first range of the first means can be brought into contact when starting contact with the means, as compared with the case where the rotating means is always rotated in the same direction, The degree of wear of the first means can be halved. As a result, the replacement period of the first means can be doubled and the maintainability can be improved.

  The gaming machine H6 according to any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, characterized in that the first means is formed by a pair of projecting portions that are projectingly symmetrical about a rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the first means is formed of a pair of projecting portions that are projecting symmetrically about the rotation axis, so that the rotating means makes one revolution. During this, the convex portions that come into contact with the second means are replaced, and the sliding means can be reciprocated twice. Therefore, when it is desired to increase the number of reciprocating movements of the slide means, it can be realized at a lower driving speed (half the driving speed) as compared with the case where the first means is formed of a single protruding portion. As a result, the maximum rotation speed of the drive unit can be reduced, and the drive unit can be downsized. It should be noted that the protruding portions may be configured by a plurality of three or more instead of a pair.

  In any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, the rotating means is configured to be capable of forming a separated state in which the first means is arranged outside a movable area of the second means. Machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H3 to H6, the first means is arranged outside the moving area of the second means when the rotating means is in the separated state. By keeping the posture of the rotating means in the separated state, for example, even if the sliding means vibrates greatly when an impact is applied to the gaming machine, the vibration causes the first means and the second means to collide. Can be prevented. Thereby, the durability of the second means and the first means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, E1 to E15, F1 to F7, G1 to G9, H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
There is a gaming machine that includes a first moving means and a second moving means supported so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first moving means, and moves the second moving means relative to the first moving means ( For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-147411).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the operation method of the second moving means.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation method of the second moving means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is a base member and a first movement supported by the base member and reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position. Means, at least a second moving means supported by the first moving means, and a driving means for operating the first moving means, wherein the second moving means includes a shaft supporting means, and the shaft supporting means. In a gaming machine displaceably supported by the first moving means via, the second moving means uses the shaft support means as an axis in comparison with the first posture and the first posture with respect to the first moving means. A first state of moving between the tilted second postures and a second state of the second moving means stopping in the second posture are formed, and the first state and the second state are the first states. It is switched during the movement of the moving means, and in the second state, gravity is The second moving means acts so as to maintain the second posture, and in the first state, the horizontal distance between the shaft supporting means and the center of gravity of the second moving means is the axis in the second state. The distance in the horizontal direction between the supporting means and the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means is set to be equal to or less than the horizontal distance. It is generated by receiving a load from the first moving means and displacing it.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein a mode of a load received by the second moving means is arranged between the first position and the second position by the first moving means. It is changed by passing the third position that is set.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the base member is a first base that supports the first moving means, and a second base that supports the second moving means. A base, one end of the second moving means is rotatably supported by the first moving means, and the other end of the second moving means is rotatably supported by the second base. In the state, it is hung on the second base.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operating method of the second moving means can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operating method of the second moving means can be improved regardless of the operating speed of the first moving means. .
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the operation method of the second moving means is improved by utilizing the load from the second base. can do.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13, 8013 Game board 61 Inner rail (rail member)
62 Outer rail (rail member)
65a Specific prize hole (large prize hole)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
210 Rear case (part of base member)
311c Ball sink rib (ball direction adjustment part)
314 Out Exit (First Out Exit, Second Out Exit)
320 front plate member 321a ball-flowing rib (ball-direction adjusting portion)
331c Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
332 Moving upper lid member (upper lid member)
332a1f Front side inclined side surface (direction changing portion)
332a3 Guiding rib (part of rib)
332c Center rib (part of rib)
410, 10410, 11410, 12410 Main body member (moving member, first moving member, first moving means)
413, 10413, 11413, 12413 Guide hole (part of support part, part of guide part)
416 Shaft support (first support)
421, 10421 Swing base member (part of second moving member, part of second moving means)
421c Insertion shaft portion (one end portion, part of support portion)
422 Decorative member (part of second moving member, part of second moving means)
423, 5423 Connection member (displacement means, part of base member, part of second base)
423b Bent portion (middle portion)
423c Shaft support rod (second support portion)
423e Slide shaft portion (the other end portion)
424, 5424 Guide plate (support base, part of base member, part of second base)
424b, 4424b Guide hole (guide route)
430 Swing member (auxiliary member)
440 Leg member (part of slide mechanism)
450 Guide member (part of base member, first base)
460 Drive device 462 Drive motor (drive means)
480, 9480 Wiring guide arm (wiring auxiliary member)
481, 9481 First guide arm (arm member)
481a Plate-shaped arm portion (part of connecting rod portion, side wall portion)
481a1 Notched part (recessed part)
481b One side tubular portion (support portion)
481c Other side tubular portion (support portion)
481c1 Expanded part (second non-contact part)
481d Supplementary part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part)
481d1 Arc-shaped attachment part (wall part)
481e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
481e2 Bottom of other side (bottom of shaft)
482, 9482 Second guide arm (arm member)
482a Plate-shaped arm portion (part of connecting rod portion, side wall portion)
482a1 arc-shaped plate portion (wall portion)
482a2 cutout portion (recessed portion)
482b One side tubular portion (support portion)
482b1 Reduced diameter portion (first non-contact portion)
482c Other side tubular portion (support portion)
482d Attaching part (part of connecting rod part, side wall part)
482e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
482e1 Bottom of one side (bottom of shaft)
483 Third guide arm (arm member)
510, 3510 Base member (base plate)
520, 2520, 3520, 7520 Drive side arm member (arm member)
523 Gear unit (passive gear unit)
523a Umbrella part 525 Color member (small area member)
525a body (body circle)
528, 2528, 7528 Bridging member 528a, 7528a First bridging member (other bridging member)
528a2 insertion part (fixed part)
528a3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotation stop pin)
528a4 rib portion (protruding portion)
528b, 7528b Second bridging member (one bridging member)
528b2 insertion part (fixed part)
528b3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotation prevention pin)
528b4 rib part (protruding part)
530, 7530 Driven arm member (arm member)
540 moving member 550 drive device 553 transmission gear 553a first gear portion 553b second gear portion 720 disk member (rotating means)
722 rotating shaft 723 transmission convex part (part of reciprocating means, part of first means)
740 Drive device (a part of drive means)
750, 11750 Working member (part of sliding means)
753, 11753 Abutting member (part of reducing means, part of abutting means)
753a, 11753a Curved part (part of side surface)
3523b Overhanging part (supporting part)
4424c Recessed part (braking part)
5425b2 Second inclined surface (braking part)
6480 Wiring guide slide (wiring auxiliary member)
8013c Direction changing unit 8610 Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
9481d1 Fitting depression (fitting depression)
9481f Detachable front locking member (front locking member)
9481f2 Fitting arm (arm)
9481g Anti-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
9481h Other side auxiliary bottom part (extended part)
9482f Overhanging front locking part (extended part)
9482g Anti-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
10413b Support plate (a part of contact means)
10421c Insertion shaft part (rod-shaped shaft support means)
C color member (lid member)
CS10 coil spring (part of reciprocating means)
N rib part (positional deviation suppression part)
W wiring

Claims (3)

A base member, a first moving unit supported by the base member and configured to be reciprocally movable between a first position and a second position, and a second moving unit supported by at least the first moving unit. And a drive means for operating the first moving means, the second moving means includes a supporting means, and the gaming machine is displaceably supported by the first moving means via the supporting means,
A second state in which a supporting force for supporting the second moving unit is generated, and a second state in which the supporting force is not generated are provided.
First posture and the third state to move between the second posture tilted inclination compared to the first posture, the second moving means said second position to said second moving means said first moving means in forming the fourth state to stop, the said third state and the fourth state is switched Oite after movement of the first moving means,
In the fourth state, gravity acts so as not to move the second moving means to the first posture,
In the third state, the one-sided state in which the gravity center position of the second moving means is horizontally one side with respect to the supporting means, and the gravity center position of the second moving means is in the horizontal direction with respect to the supporting means. It is possible to configure the other side state on the side,
In the fourth state, the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means is on the one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the supporting means,
The horizontal distance between the supporting means and the gravity center position of the second moving means in the one side state is equal to or less than the horizontal distance between the supporting means and the gravity center position of the second moving means in the fourth state,
The change in the horizontal distance between the supporting means and the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means occurs when the second moving means is displaced by receiving a load from at least the first moving means in the first state. A gaming machine characterized by being present. The constituent means includes a shaft-shaped portion,
The displacement of the second moving means when the distance in the horizontal direction between the supporting means and the position of the center of gravity of the second moving means changes occurs in the rotational direction about the shaft portion. The gaming machine according to Item 1. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a board box .

Images